You are on page 1of 236

SingleRAN

SRAN9.0

3900 Series Base Station


Configuration Principles
Issue

13

Date

2015-08-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2015. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

Contents

Contents
1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles.................................................................1
1.1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles.....................................................................................2

2 Overview.........................................................................................................................................7
3 Version Difference........................................................................................................................9
4 Product Configuration................................................................................................................13
4.1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration.......................................................................................................................14
4.1.1 BTS3900 Configuration............................................................................................................................................14
4.1.2 BTS3900A Configuration..........................................................................................................................................16
4.1.3 BTS3900L Configuration..........................................................................................................................................21
4.1.4 BTS3900AL Configuration.......................................................................................................................................23
4.1.5 DBS3900 Configuration............................................................................................................................................25
4.1.6 BTS3900C Configuration..........................................................................................................................................25
4.2 BBU Configuration.......................................................................................................................................................26
4.2.1 BBU Case Configurations.........................................................................................................................................26
4.2.2 BBU Typical Configurations.....................................................................................................................................28
4.2.3 BBU Board Configuration.........................................................................................................................................37
4.2.3.1 GSM BBU Board Configurations...........................................................................................................................37
4.2.3.2 UMTS BBU Board Configurations........................................................................................................................39
4.2.3.3 LTE BBU Board Configurations............................................................................................................................41
4.2.3.4 Common BBU Board Configurations....................................................................................................................43
4.2.3.5 Clock and Transmission Board Configurations......................................................................................................49
4.2.4 CPRI Networking Configuration...............................................................................................................................53
4.3 RF Module Configuration............................................................................................................................................54
4.3.1 RF Module Configuration.........................................................................................................................................54
4.3.2 RF Modules Working at Band 8 (900 MHz).............................................................................................................56
4.3.3 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)...........................................................................................................69
4.3.4 RF Modules Working at Band 5 (850 MHz).............................................................................................................81
4.3.5 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz)...........................................................................................................86
4.3.6 RF Modules Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz)...........................................................................................................92
4.3.7 RF Modules Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz)...........................................................................................................99
4.3.8 RF Modules Working at Band 4 (AWS).................................................................................................................104
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

Contents

4.3.9 RF Modules Working at Band 12 (700 MHz)......................................................................................................... 106


4.3.10 RF Modules Working at Band 13 (700 MHz)....................................................................................................... 107
4.3.11 RF Modules Working at Band 20 (800 MHz)....................................................................................................... 108
4.3.12 RF Modules Working at Band 28 (700 MHz)....................................................................................................... 110
4.4 AAU Configuration....................................................................................................................................................112
4.4.1 AAU3910 Configurations........................................................................................................................................112
4.4.2 AAU3902 Configurations........................................................................................................................................116
4.4.3 AAU3920 Configurations........................................................................................................................................119
4.4.4 AAU3911 Configurations........................................................................................................................................121
4.4.5 AAU3940 Configurations........................................................................................................................................128
4.5 Cabinet Upgrade.........................................................................................................................................................130
4.6 Power Module.............................................................................................................................................................136
4.7 RET Module Configurations......................................................................................................................................147
4.8 Hardware License Configuration................................................................................................................................148
4.8.1 Hardware License Configuration of GSM Base Stations........................................................................................ 148
4.8.2 Hardware License Configuration of UMTS Base Stations.....................................................................................150
4.8.3 Hardware License Configuration of LTE Base Stations.........................................................................................153
4.8.4 License Configuration of Multimode Base Stations................................................................................................158
4.9 Equipment and Product Auxiliary Material Configuration........................................................................................160
4.9.1 Configurations of Auxiliary Materials for Installation............................................................................................160
4.9.2 Auxiliary Materials on the Site................................................................................................................................173

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion................................................................184


5.1 Typical Configurations...............................................................................................................................................185
5.1.1 GSM Mode..............................................................................................................................................................185
5.1.2 UMTS Mode............................................................................................................................................................187
5.1.3 LTE Mode................................................................................................................................................................190
5.1.4 GU Co-Module........................................................................................................................................................193
5.1.5 GU Co-BBU............................................................................................................................................................199
5.1.6 GL Co-Module........................................................................................................................................................203
5.1.7 GL Co-BBU.............................................................................................................................................................208
5.1.8 GUL Triple Mode.................................................................................................................................................... 211
5.1.9 GU Co-BBP............................................................................................................................................................. 227
5.1.10 Typical Configurations of an AAU3910 in 2.6 A+1.8 P/2.1 P Scenarios ............................................................228
5.1.11 Typical Configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+ (790~960) P+(1710~2690) P Scenarios............................229
5.1.12 Typical Configurations of an AAU3902 in 1800 A+ (790~960) P+(1710~2690) P Scenarios............................230
5.2 Capacity Expansion Principles...................................................................................................................................232

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

3900 Series Base Station Configuration


Principles

Overview
This document describes the principles for configuring hardware in 3900 series base stations.
Based on specific configuration requirements in this document, the quantities of components to
be configured in a base station can be calculated and planned.
The exteriors of components and cables in this document are for reference only. The actual
exteriors may be different.

Product Version
Product Name

Solution Version

Product Version

BTS3900

l SRAN9.0

V100R009C00

BTS3900A
BTS3900L

l GBSS16.0
l RAN16.0
l eRAN7.0

BTS3900AL
DBS3900
BTS3900C

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l

Technical support engineers

System engineers

1.1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

1.1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration


Principles
This chapter describes changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles.

13 (2015-08-30)
This is the thirteenth commercial release.
Compared with Issue 12 (2015-05-30), this issue does not add or delete any topics.
Compared with Issue 12 (2015-05-30), this issue includes the following changes:
Topic

Change Description

4.3.3 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800


MHz)

Added the MRFUd V6.

4.1.2 BTS3900A Configuration

Added the BTS3900A (Ver.E) cabinet.

4.2.3.1 GSM BBU Board Configurations

Added the GTMUc.

12 (2015-05-30)
This is the twelfth commercial release.
Compared with Issue 11 (2015-01-30), this issue does not add or delete any topics.
Compared with Issue 11 (2015-01-30), this issue includes the following changes:
Contents

Change Description

4.4.4 AAU3911 Configurations

Added the 2100MHz AAU3911.

4.3.10 RF Modules Working at Band 13


(700 MHz)

Added the Band 12 and Band 13 RRU3269.

11 (2015-01-30)
This is the eleventh commercial release.
Compared with Issue 10 (2014-11-15), this issue adds the following topics:
4.4.3 AAU3920 Configurations
Compared with Issue 10 (2014-11-15), this issue includes the following changes:

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

Contents

Change Description

4.3.3 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800


MHz)

Added the 1800MHz RRU3952m.

4.4.4 AAU3911 Configurations

Added the 1800MHz AAU3911.

Compared with Issue 10 (2014-11-15), this issue does not delete any topics.

10 (2014-11-15)
This is the tenth commercial release.
Compared with Issue 09 (2014-09-30), this issue does not add or delete any topics.
Compared with Issue 09 (2014-09-30), this issue includes the following changes:
Contents

Change Description

4.3.2 RF Modules Working at Band 8 (900


MHz)

Added the 900MHz RRU3959.

4.3.3 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800


MHz)

Added the 1800MHz RRU3959w,


RRU3953w and RRU3953.

10 (2015-04-30)
This is the tenth commercial release.
Compared with Issue 09 (2014-09-30), this issue does not add or delete any topics.
Compared with Issue 09 (2014-09-30), this issue includes the following changes:
Contents

Change Description

4.3.2 RF Modules Working at Band 8 (900


MHz)

Added the 900MHz RRU3959.

4.3.3 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800


MHz)

Added the 1800MHz RRU3953w and


RRU3953.

09 (2014-09-30)
This is the nineth commercial release.
Compared with Issue 08 (2014-07-30), this issue does not add or delete any topics.
Compared with Issue 08 (2014-07-30), this issue includes the following changes:
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

Contents

Change Description

4.2.3.4 Common BBU Board


Configurations

Added the UBBPs supported in RAN15.0.

08 (2014-07-30)
This is the eighth commercial release.
Compared with Issue 07 (2014-04-30), this issue includes the following new topics:
l

Spare Part Configurations and its child topics.

Compared with Issue 07 (2014-04-30), this issue includes the following changes:
Contents

Change Description

4.9.1 Configurations of Auxiliary


Materials for Installation

Changed models of some auxiliary materials.

Compared with Issue 07 (2014-04-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.

07 (2014-04-30)
This is the seventh commercial release.
Compared with Issue 06 (2014-03-26), this issue does not include any new topics or exclude
any topics.
Compared with Issue 06 (2014-03-26), this issue does not include any changes.

06 (2014-03-26)
This is the sixth commercial release.
Compared with Issue 05 (2014-02-28), this issue is reorganized.

05 (2014-02-28)
This is the fifth commercial release.
Compared with Issue 04 (2014-01-20), this issue does not exclude any topics or include any
changes.

04 (2014-01-20)
This is the fourth commercial release.
Compared with Issue 03 (2013-11-08), this issue includes the following new topics:
l
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

4.4.2 AAU3902 Configurations


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4.2.4 CPRI Networking Configuration

5.1.9 GU Co-BBP

5.1.11 Typical Configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+ (790~960) P+(1710~2690)


P Scenarios

Compared with Issue 03 (2013-11-08), this issue includes the following changes:
Contents

Change Description

4.1 3900 Series Base Station


Configuration and its child topics

Added description of the BBU3910 to the


configuration list.

4.2.3.4 Common BBU Board


Configurations

Added configuration principles for the


UBBP.

4.8.4 License Configuration of Multimode


Base Stations

Added configuration principles for the


multimode co-BBP license.

Compared with Issue 03 (2013-11-08), this issue does not exclude any topics.

03 (2013-11-08)
This is the third commercial release.
Compared with Issue 02 (2013-08-01), this issue includes the following changes:
Contents

Change Description

BTS3900 Configuration List

Added the BTS3900 (Ver.D)+IMB06


configuration.

BTS3900L Configuration List

Added the BTS3900L (Ver.D)+IMB06


configuration.

02 (2013-08-01)
This is the second commercial release.
Compared with Issue 01 (2013-06-26), this issue does not include any new topics or exclude
any topics.
Compared with Issue 01 (2013-06-26), this issue includes the following changes:

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Contents

Change Description

4.2.3 BBU Board Configuration and its


child topics

Added models.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

01 (2013-06-26)
This is the first commercial release.
Compared with Draft A (2013-05-20), this issue does not include any new topics or exclude any
topics.
Compared with Draft A (2013-05-20), this issue includes the following changes.
Contents

Change Description

4.3 RF Module Configuration and its child


topics

Added the description of the AAU.

4.1 3900 Series Base Station


Configuration and its child topics

Added the cabinet configuration list.

Draft A (2013-05-20)
This is a draft.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

2 Overview

Overview

This document describes the configuration principles for single- and multi-mode 3900 series
base stations.

Introduction to 3900 Series Base Stations


The 3900 series base stations, which mainly comprises the baseband unit (BBU) and RF
modules, use the state-of-the-art multimode technology. A uniform design is applied to various
product forms and different installation scenarios. This significantly reduces operators' network
construction and operating costs in site acquisition, capacity expansion, and environmental
protection. The 3900 series base stations provide various evolution solutions from GSM to
UMTS and then to LTE.
l

The BBU supports multimode applications.


Boards working in different modes can be configured in a BBU so that any two or three
among GSM, UMTS, and LTE can share the BBU. In separate-MPT scenarios, one BBU
supports two modes, and two BBUs support three modes. In co-MPT scenarios, one BBU
supports three modes.
NOTE

The BBU in this document includes the BBU3900 and BBU3910.

RRUs and RFUs are radio frequency units and support multimode and multi-band
applications.
With the SDR technology, RF modules support any two or all three modes among GSM,
UMTS and LTE by using different software configurations to meet operators'
requirements. RF modules of different modes can be deployed at one base station.
Therefore, a base station can work in a single mode or any two or all three modes among
GSM, UMTS and LTE.
RF modules working in different frequency bands can also be used together.
High-power RFUs are as follows: MRFUd/MRFUe/WRFUd/WRFUe/CRFUd used
together with the BTS3900 (Ver.C/Ver.D/Ver.E) cabinets.
High-power RRUs are as follows: RRU3829/RRU3929/RRU3942/RRU3841/
RRU3961/RRU3832/RRU3839/RRU3939 that are used together with the DCDU-11B/
DCDU-12B. All other RRUs are low-power RRUs. In addition, the 2100 MHz
AAU3910 and AWS AAU3910 are also high-power RF modules.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

2 Overview

Blade RRUs include RRU3936/RRU3938/RRU3939, RRU3824/RRU3826/RRU3838/


RRU3832/RRU3839, and RRU3268/RRU3260.

Description
The following table describes the meanings of some symbols and phrases in the document.
Table 2-1 Symbol meanings
Symbol

Description

&

It is used between different modes in a separate-MPT base station. For example, GSM&UMTS
indicates a separate-MPT GSM/UMTS dual-mode base station, which can be shortened to GU.

It is used between different modes in a co-MPT base station. For example, GSM*UMTS
indicates a co-MPT GSM/UMTS dual-mode base station, which can be shortened to G*U.

It is used between different modes for the two BBUs in a separate-MPT base station. For
example, GSM&UMTS+LTE indicates a separate-MPT GSM/UMTS/LTE triple-mode base
station, which can be shortened to GU+L.

[]

For example, GSM[UMTS*LTE] indicates which can be shorted to G[U*L].

The mode following the underscore next to UMPT or UBBP is the actual mode in which the
UMPT or UBBP is working. For example, UMPT_GUL is a UMPT working in GUL mode
and UBBP_UL is a UBBP working in UL mode.

GU SDR

GSM and UMTS share the same RF modules.

GL SDR

GSM and LTE share the same RF modules.

UL SDR

UMTS and LTE share the same RF modules.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

3 Version Difference

Version Difference

SRAN9.0
The single-mode versions for SRAN9.0 are GBSS16.0, RAN16.0, and eRAN7.0. Compared
with SRAN8.0, SRAN9.0 includes the following changes:
l

Added the AAU3902 working as a 1.8 A module in GL mode.

Added the UBBP and BBU3910. A BBU3910 can be installed in the following cabinets:
BTS3900 (Ver.D), BTS3900L (Ver.D), BTS3900A (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.D), TMC11H
(Ver.D), IMB03, OMB (Ver.C) (applies to DBS3900 and BTS3900C (Ver.C)), and
BTS3900AL (Ver.A).

Added the Cloud BB technology.

Added the multimode baseband license.

Added the ODM and OFD.

SRAN8.1
The single-mode versions for SRAN8.1 are GBSS15.1, RAN15.1, and eRAN6.1. Compared
with SRAN8.0, SRAN8.1 includes the following changes:
l

Added the following RF modules: EGSM/PGSM/1800 MHz RRU3938 and enhanced


EGSM/PGSM/1800 MHz MRFUd.

Added the RRU3268 (800 MHz) for eRAN6.1.

Added the AAU3902 working as a 1.8 A module in LO mode.

Added the GULT quadruple mode.

SRAN8.0
The single-mode versions for SRAN8.0 are GBSS15.0, RAN15.0, and eRAN6.0. Compared
with SRAN7.0, SRAN8.0 includes the following changes:
l

Added the following BBU boards: UBRIb, UMPTb1, UBBP(UMTS baseband unit) and
LBBPd3 as well as UTRPa (UMTS main control and transmission unit).

Added the AAU3910, which can serve as an active unit of 1800 MHz, 2100 MHz, 2600
MHz, or AWS.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

3 Version Difference

Added the AAU3902 (2100 MHz).

Added the RRU3926 in GL mode.

Added the number of HSPA UEs that can be carried by a WBBP.

Added the GU/GL/UL/GUL co-MPT configurations.

Added the following RF modules: RRU3260 (2.6 GHz), RRU3268 (2.6 GHz), RRU3939
(1800 MHz), and RRU3936 (850 MHz and 1900 MHz).

Added the AAU3910, which can serve as an active unit of 1800 MHz, 2100 MHz, 2600
MHz, or AWS in SRAN8.0.

Added the RRU3808 (AWS) in UL mode.

Added configurations of the Lampsite solution.

SRAN7.0
The single-mode versions for SRAN7.0 are GBSS14.0, RAN14.0, and eRAN3.0. Compared
with SRAN6.0, SRAN7.0 includes the following changes:
l

Added BBU boards (UTRPc, box interconnection port, UTRPa, UCIU, UMPTa1, WBBPf,
LBBPd, and UMPTa2) and RF modules (2600 MHz LRFUe, E900 MHz MRFUe, AWS
RRU3841, 850 MHz RRU3942, AWS CRFUd, and UMPTb1 (only for UMTS)).

Added the following LTE hardware licenses: Resource Block License, BB Receive
Channel License, BB Transmit Channel, RF Transmit Channel, and RF Receive Channel.

Added the UMTS NodeB Signaling Capacity License UMTS hardware.

Added the configurations for connecting dual-mode SDR RF modules across BBUs by
BBU interconnection.

Added the following GUL triple-mode configurations: GSM&UMTS+LTE (GSM),


GSM&LTE+UMTS (GSM), GSM&UMTS+UMTS&LTE, and GSM&UMTS
+UMTS&LTE (GSM).
NOTE

In triple-mode configurations, LTE (GSM)/UMTS (GSM) indicates that LTE or UMTS uses one BBU and
shares SDR RF modules with GSM in the other BBU. Therefore, the SDR RF modules must be connected
across BBUs in a star topology to support GL or GU. GSM is contained in brackets because a GTMU board
is not configured in the BBU which is only used by LTE or UMTS.

Added configurations for GUL triple-mode co-transmission.

Added configurations for GUL triple-mode common clock.

Added the RRU3942 (1900 MHz) in UL mode.

l
l

The BTS3900 (Ver.D) AC cabinet can be stacked on an IMS06 which houses transmission
equipment or 92 Ah storage batteries.

eRAN2.2
eRAN2.2 is an LTE only version. Compared with eRAN2.1, eRAN2.2 includes the following
changes:
l

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Added the UL 2x4 MU-MIMO and DL 4x4 MIMO features, which are introduced in
eRAN2.2.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

3 Version Difference

Added dual-carrier configurations.

SRAN6.0
The single-mode versions for SRAN6.0 are GBSS13.0, RAN13.0, and eRAN2.1. Compared
with SRAN5.0, SRAN6.0 includes the following changes:
l

Added the following hardware: Band13 700 MHz RF modules, Band 20800 MHz full-band
RF modules, Band5 850 MHz MRFU V2, P900 MHz/E900 MHz MRFUd, Band2 1800
MHz MRFUd, E900 MHz RRU3929, 900 MHz RRU3928, 1800 MHz RRU3929, 1800
MHz RRU3928, 800 MHz LRFUe, 2600 MHz RRU3240, 1900 MHz RRU3942, 900 MHz
PGSM/1800 MHz/900 MHz EGSM RRU3926, P900 MHz RRU3929, 2100 MHz WRFUe,
900 MHz PGSM/1800 MHz/900 MHz EGSM RRU3936, 2100 MHz 100 W WRFUa, 2600
MHz RRU3221, 2100 MHz 80 W WRFU (enhanced), 2100 MHz RRU3839, AWS
RRU3832, EGSM/PGSM/1800 MHz RRU3938, MRFUd (enhanced), and 1800 MHz
RRU3939.

Added the maximum configuration of six UMTS baseband processing boards.

Added a cabinet, which is required by the MRFUd, WRFUd, LRFUe, and MRFUe. A single
new cabinet supports GUL triple-mode configurations including GSM&UMTS+LTE and
GSM&LTE+UMTS.

Added the following SRAN6.0 dual-mode features: GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum
Sharing and 2.0 MHz Central Frequency Point Separation between GSM and UMTS Mode.

Added the following RAN13.0 features: E-DPCCH Boosting, DC-HSDPA+MIMO, Dualthreshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation, NodeB Internal Firewall,
Anti-interference Scheduling for HSUPA, Traffic-based Activation and Deactivation of
the Supplementary Carrier in Multi-carrier, Multi-carrier Switch off Based on QoS,
Intelligent Power Management, Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs
in One Cell, CQI Adjustment, and MIMO prime.

Added the following eRAN2.1 features: TTI Bundling, LoCation Services (LCS), and Cell
Outage Detection and Compensation.

Added the GSM high power 80 W license.

Added the BTS3900 (AC) Ver.D and BTS3900L (AC) Ver.D cabinets, which apply to 220
V AC scenarios.

SRAN5.0
The single-mode versions used with SRAN5.0 are GBSS12.0, RAN12.0, and eRAN2.0.
Compared with SRAN3.0, SRAN5.0 includes the following changes:
l

Added the following hardware: WBBPd (UMTS baseband board), UTRPb4 (GSM
transmission board), RRU3806 of 2100 MHz (80 W), RRU3808 of AWS, RRU3824 of
2100 MHz, RRU3826 of 2100 MHz, RRU3838 of 2100 MHz, RRU3832 of 2100 MHz,
WRFUd of 2100 MHz, RRU3828 of 2100 MHz, and RRU3829 of 2100 MHz.

Added the following SRAN5.0 dual-mode features: Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing
and Bandwidth Sharing of MBTS in Multi-mode Co-Transmission.

Added the following features, which are introduced in RAN12.0: Interference Cancellation
(IC), Frequency Domain Equalization (FDE), UL L2 Enhanced, DL 64QAM+MIMO, UL
16QAM, DC-HSDPA, and Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

3 Version Difference

Added the GSM high power 60 W license.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Product Configuration

This chapter describes the principles for configuring various components in 3900 series base
stations.
3900 series base stations use modular design. A macro base station consists of a cabinet, a BBU,
and RF modules. Its minimum configuration includes the cabinet as well as the minimum
configuration of the following components: baseband processing units, main control and
transmission units, and RF modules. A distributed base station consists of a baseband processing
unit and an RF unit. Its minimum configuration includes the minimum configuration of the
following components: baseband processing units, main control and transmission units, and RF
modules. The corresponding boards or license can be added to expand the baseband processing
capacity, RF modules, and transmission ports, which implement smooth capacity expansion.
4.1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration
4.2 BBU Configuration
4.3 RF Module Configuration
4.4 AAU Configuration
4.5 Cabinet Upgrade
4.6 Power Module
4.7 RET Module Configurations
4.8 Hardware License Configuration
4.9 Equipment and Product Auxiliary Material Configuration

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

4.1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration


4.1.1 BTS3900 Configuration
This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a
BTS3900 site.

BTS3900 Configuration Principles


The following table lists the BTS3900 configuration principles.
Table 4-1 BTS3900 configuration principles
Single/
Dual/
TripleMode Base
Station

Maximu
m
Number
of
Cabinet
s

Maxi
mum
Num
ber of
BBUs

Maximum Number of RF Modules

Note:

Single- or
dual-mode
base station

l If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs


are supported.

SeparateMPT triplemode base


station

l If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 12


RFUs and 6 RRUs are supported.
2

If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs are


supported.
If RFUs and RRUs are configured:
l A Ver.B or Ver.C cabinet supports a maximum of 12
RFUs and 6 RRUs. The DCDU supplying power to
RRUs must be installed on a wall outside the cabinet.

For highpower RRUs,


see2
Overview.

l A site that uses Ver.D cabinets supports a maximum of


12 RFUs, 6 high-power RRUs, and 3 low-power RRUs.
The DCDU supplying power to RRUs can be installed
in the BTS3900 cabinet.
Co-MPT
triple-mode
base station

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs are


supported.

If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs


and 6 RRUs are supported.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

NOTE

l A single Ver.B or Ver.C AC cabinet can house a maximum of one BBU. A single Ver.D cabinet can
house a maximum of two BBUs.
l If the MRFUd, WRFUd, WRFUe, or MRFUe is configured, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be used.
l If RFUs and RRUs are configured and the RRUs are of high power, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be
used.
l The BTS3900 (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) AC cabinet and +24 V DC BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet can neither be
configured as a separate-MPT triple-mode base station nor be configured with RFUs and RRUs
together. The Ver.D AC cabinet can be configured with a maximum of 6 RFUs and 9 RRUs.

BTS3900 Configuration List


The following table lists BTS3900 cabinets and their internal devices.
Table 4-2 Configuration list
External Model

Description

Configuration Principle

WD2B48RACK00

BTS3900 Cabinet
(DC -48 V)

Indoor macro cabinet BTS3900 (-48 V DC), which houses the BBU
case and RFUs and applies to the AC scenarios with backup power.

WD2B48RACK03

BTS3900 Cabinet
(Ver.C, DC -48V)

WD2P048CAB10

BTS3900 Cabinet
(Ver.D, DC -48V)

-48 V DC BTS3900 indoor macro base station, which houses BBUs


and RFUs and applies to the 220 V AC scenarios with backup power
and 110 V AC scenarios with or without backup power.
One piece of DC cabinet can be configured in 220 V AC scenarios
without backup power when the site needs to be configured with 7
to 11 RFUs.

WD2PACRACK00

BTS3900 Cabinet
(AC 220V/110V)

WD2BACRACK01

BTS3900 Cabinet
(Ver.C, AC 220V/
110V)

WD2P220CAB00

BTS3900 Cabinet
(Ver.D, 220VAC)

220 V AC or 110 V AC indoor macro cabinet for housing the power


module, BBUs, and RFUs

220 V AC indoor macro cabinet, consisting of a BTS3900 cabinet


and an IMS06 stacked together. The IMS06 can house a 5 U AC
power device. It is supported from SRAN6.0 onwards.
In 220 V AC scenarios without backup power, one piece is
configured by default. When two cabinets need to be configured, the
site can be configured with one AC cabinet and one DC cabinet.

WD2M048BBU01

BBU Box

Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one


UPEUc. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power.

WD2M048BBU10

BBU3910 Box

Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one


UPEUd and FANd. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

NOTE

When the BTS3900 is stacked on two IMS06s, an EPU05A and a group of batteries (92 Ah) or an EPU05A
and two transmission devices can be installed.

4.1.2 BTS3900A Configuration


This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a
BTS3900A site.

BTS3900A configuration principles


The following table lists the BTS3900A configuration principles.
Table 4-3 BTS3900A configuration principles
Single/
Dual/
TripleMode Base
Station

Maximum Number of
Cabinets

Maxi
mum
Numb
er of
BBUs

Maximum Number of RF
Modules

Remarks

Single- or
dual-mode
base station

l A BTS3900A site can


uses Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets supports a
maximum of two groups
of APM30H+RFC.

l If only RFUs need to be


configured, a maximum of 12
RFUs are supported.

For high-power
RRUs, see 2
Overview.

SeparateMPT triplemode base


station
Co-MPT
triple-mode
base station

l A BTS3900A site that


uses Ver.D cabinets
supports a maximum of
one APM30H and two
RFCs.
l The BTS3900A (Ver.E)
supports a maximum of
one APM30H and two
RFCs.

l If RFUs and RRUs need to be


configured:
l A BTS3900A site that uses Ver.B
or Ver.C cabinets supports a
maximum of 6 RFUs and 6 RRUs.
l A BTS3900A site that uses Ver.D
cabinets support a maximum of 6
RFUs, 6 high-power RRUs, and 3
low-power RRUs.
l A BTS3900A site using Ver.E
cabinets supports a maximum of
6 RFUs, 6 high-power RRUs, and
9 low-power RRUs, or supports
12 RFUs and 9 low-power RRUs.

NOTE

l If the MRFUd, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFUe, or MRFUe is configured, a Ver.C, Ver.D or Ver.E cabinet
must be used.
l When RFUs and RRUs are configured and the RRUs are of high power, a Ver.C, Ver.D or Ver.E
cabinet must be used.

BTS3900A Configuration List


The following table lists the BTS3900A cabinets and their internal devices.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-4 Configuration list


External Model

Description

Function

WD2P022APM03

Advanced Power
Module for
BTS3900A (APM30,
AC 220 V)

Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with 220


V AC power

WD2P022APM04

Advanced Power
Module for
BTS3900A (APM30,
AC 220 V)

WD2P022APM05

Advanced Power
Module for
BTS3900A (APM30,
AC 220 V)

By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total
power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 1600 W,
an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.

Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with 220


V AC power, with a heat exchanger
By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total
power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 1600 W,
an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required. The cabinet of the 05/06
type is used in cold areas with a temperature below -20C.

WD2P022APM06

Advanced Power
Module for
BTS3900A (APM30,
AC 220 V)

WD2P011APM03

Advanced Power
Module for
BTS3900A (APM30,
AC 110V)

Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with 110


V AC power

WD2B048APM03

Advanced Power
Module for
BTS3900A (APM30,
-48 V)

Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with -48


V DC power

WD2B048APM04

Advanced Power
Module for
BTS3900A (APM30,
DC -48 V)

WD2B048APM07

Advanced Power
Module for
BTS3900A (APM30,
DC -48 V)

WD2B048APM06

Advanced Power
Module for
BTS3900A (APM30,
DC -48 V)

WD2B226RFU03

BTS3900A RFU
Cabinet

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total
power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 1600 W,
an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.

Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with -48


V DC power, with a heat exchanger
For a cabinet with heating film, the customer needs to provide
independent power supply for the heating film.

BTS3900A cabinet, used for housing RFUs

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External Model

Description

Function

WD2B226RFU04

BTS3900A RFU
Cabinet

WD2B116RFU03

BTS3900A RFU
Cabinet

Outdoor macro cabinet housing RFUs for a BTS3900A site


supplied with 110 V AC power

WD2M048BBU01

BBU Box

Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing


one UPEUc. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power.

WD2M048BBU10

BBU3910 Box

Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing


one UPEUd and FANd. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power.

WD2P022CAB00

BTS3900A Cabinet
(Ver.C, AC 220 V)

220 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It


contains an APM30 and an RFC.

WD2P022CAB01

BTS3900A Cabinet
(Ver.C, AC 220 V)

In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if highpower RRUs are required. In an outdoor macro base stations with
a 220 V power supply, this item needs to be configured and a site
supports a maximum of two cabinets. One BTS3900A cabinet
consists of one APM30 cabinet and one RFC cabinet. Two
BTS3900A cabinets are required in a triple-mode scenario.
By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total
power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W,
an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.
The cabinet of the 01 type is used in cold areas with a temperature
below -20C.

WD2P011CAB00

BTS3900A Cabinet
(Ver.C, AC 110 V)

110 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It


contains an APM30 and an RFC.
In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if highpower RRUs are required.
In 110 V DC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two outdoor
macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one
RFC, which support triple modes.
By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total
power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W,
an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.

WD2P048CAB00

BTS3900A Cabinet
(Ver.C, DC -48 V)

WD2P048CAB01

BTS3900A Cabinet
(Ver.C, DC -48 V)

-48 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It


contains an APM30 and an RFC.
In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if highpower RRUs are required. In -48 V DC scenarios, a site supports
a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets
include one APM30 and one RFC, which support triple modes.
The cabinet of the 01 type is used in cold areas with a temperature
below -20C.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External Model

Description

Function

WD2B226RFU05

BTS3900A RFU
Cabinet (Ver.C)

BTS3900A cabinet, used for housing RFUs


l When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be
configured.
l This item is configured when an RFU cabinet is required.
l In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if
high-power RRUs are required.

WD2P022CAB21

BTS3900A Cabinet
(Ver.D, AC 220 V)

220 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It


contains an APM30 and an RFC.
l When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be
configured.
l In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if
high-power RRUs are required.
l In 220 V DC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two
outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30
and one RFC, which support triple modes.
By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total
power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W,
an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.

WD2P022CAB22

BTS3900A Cabinet
(Ver.D, AC 220 V)

110 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It


contains an APM30 and an RFC.
l When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be
configured.
l In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if
high-power RRUs are required.
l In 110 V DC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two
outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30
and one RFC, which support triple modes.
By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total
power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W,
an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.

WD2P011CAB23

BTS3900A Cabinet
(Ver.D, AC 110 V)

110 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It


contains an APM30 and an RFC.
l When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be
configured.
l In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if
high-power RRUs are required.
l In 110 V DC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two
outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30
and one RFC, which support triple modes.
By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total
power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W,
an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External Model

Description

Function

WD2P048CAB24

BTS3900A Cabinet
(Ver.D, DC -48 V)

-48 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It


contains an APM30 and an RFC.
l When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be
configured.
l In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if
high-power RRUs are required. In -48 V DC scenarios, a site
supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two
cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC, which support
triple modes.

WD2P048CAB25

BTS3900A Cabinet
(Ver.D, DC -48 V)

When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be configured.


l In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if
high-power RRUs are required.
l In -48 V DC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two
outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30
and one RFC, which support triple modes.

WD2B226RFU11

BTS3900A RFU
Cabinet (Ver.D, DC
-48 V)

BTS3900A cabinet, used for housing RFUs


l When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be
configured.
l This item is configured when an RFU cabinet is required.
l In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if
high-power RRUs are required.

WD2P022CAB03

BTS3900A Cabinet
(Ver.E, 220 V AC)

220 V AC BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It


contains an APM30 and an RFC.
l A site supports a maximum of one cabinet. When more than
six RFUs are used, one cabinet for stacked installation and one
RFC are required.
A cabinet contains two PSUs (AC/DC) by default. When the total
power consumption of a single cabinet exceeds 3000 W, an
additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.

WD2P011CAB25

BTS3900A Cabinet
(Ver.E, 110 V AC)

110 V AC BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It


contains an APM30 and an RFC.
l A site supports a maximum of one cabinet. When more than
six RFUs are used, one cabinet for stacked installation and one
RFC are required.
A cabinet contains two PSUs (AC/DC) by default. When the total
power consumption of a single cabinet exceeds 3000 W, an
additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External Model

Description

Function

WD2P048CAB26

BTS3900A Cabinet
(Ver.E, -48 V DC)

l -48 V DC BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation.


It contains an APM30 and an RFC.
At newly deployed sites, it needs to be configured when
high-power RRUs are used. A site supports a maximum of
one cabinet. When more than six RFUs are used, one
cabinet for stacked installation and one RFC are required.

WD2P048CAB28

WD2B486RFU09

BTS3900A Cabinet
(Ver.E, -48 V DC)

When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be configured.

BTS3900A RFU
Cabinet (Ver.E, -48 V
DC)

BTS3900A outdoor macro cabinet used for housing RFUs

l A site supports a maximum of two cabinets. When more than


six RFUs are used, one cabinet for stacked installation and one
RFC are required.

l The cabinet is configured when no APM30 is required.


l At newly deployed sites, it needs to be configured when highpower RRUs are used.

4.1.3 BTS3900L Configuration


This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a
BTS3900L site.

BTS3900L configuration principles


The following table lists the BTS3900L configuration principles.
Table 4-5 BTS3900L configuration principles
Single/
Dual/
TripleMode
Base
Station

Maximu
m
Number
of
Cabinets

Maximu
m
Number
of BBUs

Maximum Number of RF Modules

Note:

Single- or
dual-mode
base station

l If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs


are supported.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

l If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 12


RFUs and 6 RRUs are supported.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Single/
Dual/
TripleMode
Base
Station

Maximu
m
Number
of
Cabinets

Maximu
m
Number
of BBUs

Maximum Number of RF Modules

Note:

SeparateMPT
triplemode base
station

l If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs


are supported.

For highpower RRUs,


see 2
Overview.

Co-MPT
triplemode base
station

l If RFUs and RRUs need to be configured:


A BTS3900L site that uses Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets
supports a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs. A
BTS3900L site that uses Ver.D cabinets supports a
maximum of 12 RFUs, 6 high-power RRUs, and 3
low-power RRUs.
l If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs
are supported.

l If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 12


RFUs and 6 RRUs are supported.

NOTE

l If the MRFUd, WRFUd, WRFUe, or MRFUe is configured, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be used.
l If RFUs and RRUs are configured and the RRUs are of high power, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be
used.

BTS3900L Configuration List


The following table lists BTS3900L cabinets and their internal devices.
Table 4-6 Configuration list
External Model

Description

Function

WD2B48RACK01

BTS3900L
Cabinet (DC -48
V)

-48 V DC BTS3900L (Ver.B) indoor macro cabinet, which houses BBUs


and RFUs and applies to the 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios with or
without backup power.

WD2B48RACK04

BTS3900L
Cabinet (Ver.C,
DC -48 V)

-48 V DC BTS3900L (Ver.C) indoor macro cabinet, which houses BBUs


and RFUs and applies to the 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios with or
without backup power.

WD2P048CABL1

BTS3900L
Cabinet (Ver.D,
DC -48 V)

-48 V DC BTS3900L (Ver.D) indoor macro cabinet, which houses BBUs


and RFUs and applies to the 220 V AC scenarios with backup power and
110 V AC scenarios with or without backup power.

WD2P220CAB01

BTS3900L
Cabinet (Ver.D,
AC 220 V)

220 V AC BTS3900L (Ver.D) indoor macro base station, which consists


of a BTS3900L cabinet stacked on an IMS06. It houses the EPU05A,
BBUs, and RFUs. It is supported from SRAN6.0 onwards.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External Model

Description

Function

WD2M048BBU01

BBU Box

Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one


UPEUc. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power.

WD2M048BBU10

BBU3910 Box

Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one


UPEUd and FANd. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power.

4.1.4 BTS3900AL Configuration


This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a
BTS3900AL site.

BTS3900AL configuration principles


The following table lists the BTS3900AL configuration principles.
Table 4-7 BTS3900AL configuration principles
Single/
Dual/
TripleMode
Base
Station

Maximum
Number of
Cabinets

Maxi
mum
Num
ber of
BBUs

Maximum Number of RF Modules

Note:

Single- or
dual-mode
base station

A maximum
of two
BTS3900AL
cabinets (1
BTS3900AL
AC cabinet+1
BTS3900AL
DC cabinet)

If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 18 RFUs


are supported.

For highpower
RRUs, see 2
Overview.

SeparateMPT triplemode base


station
Co-MPT
triple-mode
base station

If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 9


RFUs and 9 RRUs are supported.
2

If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 18 RFUs


are supported.
If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 9
RFUs and 12 RRUs are supported.

If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 18 RFUs


are supported.
If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 9
RFUs and 9 RRUs are supported.

NOTE

If a site is configured with two BTS3900AL cabinets. the two cabinets must be installed side by side with
the BTS3900AL DC cabinet on the right.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

BTS3900AL Configuration List


The following table lists BTS3900AL cabinets and their internal devices.
Table 4-8 Configuration list
External Model

Descriptio
n

Function

WD2P048BBU00

BBU Box

Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one


UPEUc. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power.

WD2P3910BBU0

BBU3910
Box

Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUd
and FANd. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power.

WD5P0ACCAB00

BTS3900A
L Cabinet
(AC 220 V/
110 V)

BTS3900AL 220 V/110 V outdoor cabinet


In 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of one AC
outdoor macro cabinet and one DC outdoor macro cabinet.
By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power
consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W, an additional PSU
(AC/DC) is required.
Each cabinet is configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs and 2 BBUs.

WD5P0ACCAB01

BTS3900A
L Cabinet
(AC 220 V/
110 V)

BTS3900AL 220 V/110 V outdoor cabinet, used in cold areas


In 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of one AC
outdoor macro cabinet and one DC outdoor macro cabinet.
By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power
consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W, an additional PSU
(AC/DC) is required.
Each cabinet is configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs and 2 BBUs.

WD5P0DCCAB00

BTS3900A
L Cabinet
(DC -48 V)

BTS3900AL -48 V DC outdoor cabinet


When a site is configured with more than 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC
cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet or two BTS3900AL DC cabinets
can be configured to support a maximum of 18 RFUs. The DC cabinet is
powered by the AC cabinet.
Each cabinet is configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs.

WD5P0DCCAB01

BTS3900A
L Cabinet
(DC -48 V)

BTS3900AL -48 V DC outdoor cabinet, used in cold areas


When a site is configured with more than 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC
cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet or two BTS3900AL DC cabinets
can be configured to support a maximum of 18 RFUs. The DC cabinet is
powered by the AC cabinet.
Each cabinet is configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

4.1.5 DBS3900 Configuration


The OMB cabinet is an outdoor power cabinet and provides no backup power. It is used for the
DBS3900 and cannot be configured with an APM30 series power cabinet.

OMB Configurations
The following table lists the cabinets used by the OMB and their components.
Table 4-9 Configuration list
External Model

Description

Function

QWMB0OMBAC00

OMB Cabinet
(Ver.C,
220/110V AC)

This is an OMB (Ver.C) cabinet supplied with 220 V AC single-phase


or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power. Each cabinet supports a maximum
of six RRUs and one BBU. Each site can be configured with a
maximum of one cabinet.

QWMB0OMBDC00

OMB Cabinet
(Ver.C, -48V
DC)

This is an OMB (Ver.C) cabinet supplied with -48 V DC power. Each


cabinet supports a maximum of six RRUs and one BBU. Each site can
be configured with a maximum of one cabinet.

WD2MR4850G00

PSU module
(AC/DC)

This is a power supply module.


One PSU is configured when the OMB (Ver.C) AC cabinet uses four
to six DC RRUs.

4.1.6 BTS3900C Configuration


This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a
BTS3900C site.

BTS3900C Configuration Principles


The following table lists the BTS3900C configuration principles.
Table 4-10 BTS3900C configuration principles
Cabinet
Configuration

Maximu
m
Number
of BBUs

RF Module
Configuration

Remarks

BTS3900C (Ver.C),
consisting of an
OMB (Ver.C) and an
RRU subrack

Only one RRU can be


configured.

It applies to a single- or multi-mode base


station.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

BTS3900C Configuration List


The following table lists the cabinets used by the BTS3900C and their internal devices.
Table 4-11 Configuration list
External Model

Description

Function

QWMB0OMBAC00

OMB Cabinet
(Ver.C, AC 220
V/110 V)

This is an OMB (Ver.C) cabinet supplied with 220 V AC single-phase


or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power.

QWMB0OMBDC00

OMB Cabinet
(Ver.C, DC -48
V)

OMB (Ver.C) supplied with -48 V DC power

WD2M048BBU01

BBU Box

Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one


UPEUc. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power.

WD2M048BBU10

BBU3910 Box

Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one


UPEUd and FANd. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power.

4.2 BBU Configuration


This section describes the number of BBUs configured in various types of base stations, the
number of different types of boards in the BBU, and the slot assignment principles.

4.2.1 BBU Case Configurations


The BBU is a mandatory component in 3900 series base stations. Different principles apply to
the BBU configuration in different types of base stations.
The following table lists the principles for configuring BBU cases in single-, dual-, and triplemode base stations.
Table 4-12 BBU Case Configuration Principle
Single/Dual/
Triple-Mode
Base Station

Configured
Mode

BBU Case Configuration Principle

Single-mode
base station

GSM

One BBU is configured.

UMTS

One BBU is configured.

LTE

One BBU is configured.

GU

The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a GTMU/UMPT_G
and a WMPT/UMPT_U.

Dual-mode
base station

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

Single/Dual/
Triple-Mode
Base Station

Separate-MPT
triple-mode
base station

4 Product Configuration

Configured
Mode

BBU Case Configuration Principle

G*U

The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a UMPT in G*U (coMPT) mode.

GL

The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a GTMU/UMPT_G
and an LMPT/UMPT_L.

G*L

The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a UMPT in G*L (coMPT) mode.

UL

The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a WMPT/UMPT_U
and an LMPT/UMPT_L.

U*L

The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a UMPT in U*L (coMPT) mode.

UT

The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a WMPT/UMPT_U
and an LMPT/UMPT_T.

L*T

The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a UMPT in L*T (coMPT) mode.

GU+L

Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS, and the
other BBU is used by LTE.

GL+U

Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and LTE, and the other
BBU is used by UMTS.

GU+UL

Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS, and the
other BBU is shared by UMTS and LTE.

GU+L(G)

Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS, and the
other BBU is used by LTE. The two BBUs are interconnected.

GL+U(G)

Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and LTE, and the other
BBU is used by UMTS. The two BBUs are interconnected.

GU+UL(G)

Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS, and the
other BBU is shared by UMTS and LTE. The two BBUs are interconnected.

G[U*L]

The three modes share one BBU. The UMTS and LTE modes share a UMPT,
and the GSM mode is supported by a GTMU.

G[L*T]

Three modes share one BBU. The LTE FDD and LTE TDD modes share a
UMPT, and the GSM mode is supported by a GTMU.

U[L*T]

Three modes share one BBU. The LTE FDD and LTE TDD modes share a
UMPT, and the UMTS mode is supported by a WMPT/UMPT_U.

G[U*T]

Three modes share one BBU. The UMTS and LTE TDD modes share a UMPT,
and the GSM mode is supported by a GTMU.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Single/Dual/
Triple-Mode
Base Station

Configured
Mode

BBU Case Configuration Principle

Co-MPT
triple-mode
base station

G*U*L

The three modes share one UMPT in one BBU.

G*U*T

The three modes share one UMPT in one BBU.

G*L*T

The three modes share one UMPT in one BBU.

U*L*T

The three modes share one UMPT in one BBU.


U*L*T

Quadruplemode base
station with coMPT

G*U*L*T

The four modes share one UMPT in one BBU.

GU+[L*T]
(G)

Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS, and the
other BBU is shared by LTE FDD and LTE TDD.

4.2.2 BBU Typical Configurations


Model

Descript
ion

Functio
n

Maximu
m
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

WD2M048BBU01

BBU3900
Box

BBU
case

BTS3900
/
BTS3900
A/
BTS3900
L/
BTS3900
AL/
DBS390
0: 2

Optional. A maximum of two BBUs can be


configured. In separate-MPT scenarios, two BBUs
must be configured to support triple modes. In coMPT scenarios, one BBU can support triple modes.
It is a 2 U high and 19" wide standardized subrack,
which provides eight slots for housing boards. These
boards include a UPEUc that provides power of 360
W.

Used for
housing
baseband
processin
g boards

BTS3900
C: 1

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Descript
ion

Functio
n

Maximu
m
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

WD2M048BBU10

BBU3910
Box

BBU
case

BTS3900
/
BTS3900
A/
BTS3900
L/
BTS3900
AL/
DBS390
0: 2

Optional. A maximum of two BBUs can be


configured. In separate-MPT scenarios, two BBUs
must be configured to support triple modes. In coMPT or hybrid-MPT scenarios, one BBU can support
triple modes. It is a 2 U high and 19" wide
standardized subrack, which provides eight slots for
housing boards. These boards include a UPEUd that
provides power of 650 W and a FANd.

Used for
housing
baseband
processin
g boards

BTS3900
C: 1

The BBU is a baseband control unit. It provides a maximum of eight slots for boards. In separateMPT scenarios, the BBU can work in GO, UO, LO, GU, GL, or UL mode. To achieve the GUL
triple-mode application, two BBUs are required. In co-MPT scenarios, only one BBU is required
to achieve the GUL triple-mode application.
In SRAN6.0, the BBU supports the GSM& WCDMA+LTE and GSM&LTE+WCDMA
configurations. In GSM&WCDMA+LTE configuration, GSM and UMTS share one BBU3900
and LTE uses the other BBU3900. In GSM&LTE+WCDMA configuration, GSM and LTE share
one BBU3900 and WCDMA uses the other BBU3900.
SRAN7.0 supports the following triple-mode configurations: GSM&WCDMA+LTE (GSM),
GSM&LTE+WCDMA (GSM), GSM&WCDMA+WCDMA&LTE, and GSM&WCDMA
+WCDMA&LTE (GSM). In GU+L (GSM) mode, GSM and UMTS use one BBU3900 and LTE
uses the other BBU3900; SDR RF modules are connected to the two BBUs to support GL dualmode. In GL+U (GSM) mode, GSM and LTE use one BBU3900 and UMTS uses the other BBU;
SDR RF modules are connected to the two BBUs to support UL dual-mode.In GU+UL mode,
GSM and UMTS use one BBU3900, and UMTS and LTE use the other BBU3900. In GU+UL
(GSM) mode, GSM and UMTS use one BBU3900, and UMTS and LTE use the other BBU3900;
SDR RF modules are connected to the two BBUs to support GL dual-mode.
In SRAN7.0, GU+L (GSM) and GL+U (GSM) configurations are introduced, and SDR RF
modules are connected to two BBU3900s, which requires BBU3900 interconnection. In this
case, the two BBU3900s are interconnected by connecting the UCIU in the root BBU and the
UMPT in the leaf BBU.
BBU3900 (GSM&WCDMA+LTE (GSM)) typical board configuration (GL SDR)

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

BBU3900 (GSM&LTE+WCDMA (GSM)) typical board configuration (GU SDR)

The multimode co-MPT application is supported since SRAN8.0. Added the GSM*WCDMA,
GSM*LTE, WCDMA*LTE, GSM*WCDMA*LTE, and GSM&[WCDMA*LTE]
configurations. The GSM*UMTS, GSM*LTE, UMTS*LTE configurations indicate that any
two of the three modes share one main control board. The GSM*UMTS*LTE configuration
indicates that the three modes share one main control board. The GSM&[UMTS*LTE]
configuration indicates that the UMTS and LTE share one main control board while GSM uses
a GO main control board. In SRAN8.0, it is recommended that one BBU3900 be configured to
support co-MPT mode. If two BBUs are used to support co-MPT, they can be interconnected in
UCIU+UMPT mode.
Note: The asterisk (*) is used between different modes in a co-MPT base station. The modes
contained in square brackets share the same main control board.
From SRAN8.1 onwards, two BBUs that support co-MPT can be interconnected in UMPT
+UMPT mode.
SRAN9.0 and later versions support the BBU3910 (with a fully-interconnected backplane),
which supports enhanced board interconnection technologies, for example, CoMP and CA. The
BBU3910 applies to deployment and capacity expansion scenarios.
Since SRAN9.0, co-MPT and hybrid-MPT in two BBUs are supported, such as [G*U*L]+
[G*U*L] and G&[U*L]+[U*L]. When both BBUs are configured with UMPTs, the UMPT
+UMPT interconnection is recommended to substitute for the UCIU+UMPT interconnection
that is supported since SRAN7.0.
From SRAN9.0, the GUL co-BBP technique is supported, which means that multiple modes
including GSM, UMTS, and LTE can be concurrently configured on one baseband processing
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

board. The co-BBP technique is supported only by co-MPT base stations, not by separate-MPT
base stations.
In separate-MPT base stations, different modes cannot be configured in the same baseband
processing board.
Like the BBU3900, the BBU3910 supports separate-MPT, co-MPT, and hybrid-MPT scenarios
and it can be interconnected with the BBU3900. The following figures only show the typical
configurations independently supported by the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
Figure 4-1 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 working in GSM&UMTS mode
FAN

GTMU
WBBP

WMPT/UMPT

UEIU
UPEU

Figure 4-2 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 in GSM&LTE mode


FAN

GTMU
LBBP

LMPT/UMPT

UEIU
UPEU

Figure 4-3 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 working in UMTS&LTE mode


UEIU

FAN
LBBP

LMPT/UMPT

WBBP

WMPT/UMPT

UPEU

Figure 4-4 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 in GSM*UMTS mode


FAN

UEIU

UBRIb
WBBP

UMPT

UPEU

GSM*LTE and UMTS*LTE are similar. Each mode is configured with the corresponding
baseband processing board.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Figure 4-5 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 in GSM*UMTS*LTE mode


FAN

UEIU

UBRIb
LBBP
WBBP

UPEU
UMPT

Figure 4-6 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 in GSM&[WCDMA*LTE] mode


FAN

GTMU
LBBP
WBBP

UEIU
UPEU

UMPT

Figure 4-7 Typical board configuration of a BBU3910 in GSM&WCDMA mode


FANd

UEIU

UBRIb
UBBPd_U

UMPT_G

UBBPd_U

UMPT_U

UPEUd

Figure 4-8 Typical board configuration of a BBU3910 in GSM&LTE mode


FANd

UEIU

UBRIb
UBBPd_L

UMPT_G

UBBPd_L

UMPT_L

UPEUd

Figure 4-9 Typical board configuration of a BBU3910 in WCDMA&LTE mode


FANd

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

UBBPd_U

UBBPd_U

UBBPd_U

UBBPd_U

UBBPd_L

UMPT_L

UBBPd_L

UMPT_U

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

UEIU

UPEUd

32

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Figure 4-10 Typical board configuration of a BBU3910 in GSM*UMTS mode


FANd

UEIU
UBBPd_U
UBBPd_U

UPEUd
UMPT_GU

Figure 4-11 Typical board configuration of a BBU3910 in GSM*LTE mode


UEIU

FANd
UBBPd_L
UBBPd_L

UPEUd
UMPT_GL

Figure 4-12 Typical board configuration of a BBU3910 in UMTS*LTE mode


FANd

UBBPd_U

UBBPd_U

UBBPd_U

UBBPd_U

UBBPd_L
UBBPd_L

UEIU

UPEUd
UMPT_UL

Figure 4-13 Typical board configuration of a BBU3910 in GSM*UMTS*LTE mode


FANd

UBBPd_U

UEIU

UBBPd_U
UBBPd_L
UBBPd_L

UPEUd
UMPT_GUL

Typical board configuration of BBU3900+BBU3910 in GSM&WCDMA+LTE mode

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Typical board configuration of BBU3900+BBU3910 in GSM&LTE+WCDMA mode

Typical board configuration of BBU3900+BBU3910 in the GSM*UMTS*LTE co-MPT


scenario with two BBUs

Typical board configuration of BBU3910+BBU3910 in the GSM*UMTS*LTE co-MPT with


two BBUs
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

SRAN8.1 and later versions support following GULT quadruple-mode application scenarios:
l

G*U*T

G*L*T

U*L*T

G*U*L*T (illustrated by a figure)

U&T

G&[L*T] (illustrated by a figure)

U&[L*T]

G&U+[L*T](G) (illustrated by a figure)

L*T

G&[U*T] (illustrated by a figure)

The following figures use the BBU3900s as examples. Note that the BBU3910 does not support
old boards.
Figure 4-14 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 in GSM*UMTS*FDD*TDD mode
FAN

UBBPd_U

UBBPd_T

UPEU

UBBPd_L
UBBPd_L
UBBPd_U

UPEU
UMPT_GULT

Figure 4-15 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 in GSM&[FDD*TDD] mode


FAN

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

UBBPd_T

UBBPd_T

UBBPd_T

GTMU

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

UPEU

35

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

UBBPd_L
UBBPd_L

UPEU
UMPT_LT

Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 in GSM&UMTS+FDD*TDD mode

Figure 4-16 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 in GSM&[UMTS*TDD] mode


FAN

UBBPd_T

UBBPd_T

UBBPd_U

GTMU

UBBPd_U
UBBPd_U

UPEU

UPEU
UMPT_UT

In separate-MPT scenarios, the dual-star CPRI connection is recommended for multimode


RRUs, that is, the baseband processing board of each mode provides CPRI ports for connecting
RRUs.
In co-MPT scenarios, the CPRI MUX topology is recommended for multimode RRUs, that is,
multiple modes share one CPRI cable. If the GSM mode is deployed on a main control board
where co-MPT is applied, a UBRIb must be configured. In UL co-MPT scenario, the WBBPf,
LBBPd, or UBBPd can provide CPRI ports.
The following table lists the CPRI MUX-related specifications of different boards. The number
of boards to be configured is determined by these boards' cell access capabilities. UBBPd boards
introduced in SRAN9.0 have higher CPRI port capabilities and access capabilities than WBBPf/
LBBPd boards.
CPR
I
Line
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

GU CPRI MUX on the


UBRIb

GL CPRI MUX on the


UBRIb

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

UL CPRI MUX on the


WBBPf/LBBPd

36

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Rate
(G)

Cell
Access
Capabilit
y of a
CPRI Port

Cell Access
Capability
of the Board

Cell
Access
Capabilit
y of a
CPRI Port

Cell Access
Capability
of the Board

Cell Access
Capability
of a CPRI
Port

Cell Access
Capability of
the Board

2.5

G: 16
TRXs+U:
4C

G: 96 TRXs
+U: 24 C

G: 16
TRXs+L:
10 MHz

G: 96 TRXs
+L: 6x10
MHz

U: 4 C+L:
10 MHz

U: 24 TRXs
+L: 6x10 MHz

4.9

G: 32
TRXs+U:
8C

G: 126
TRXs+U:
24 C

G: 32
TRXs+L:
20 MHz

G: 126
TRXs+L:
4x20 MHz

U: 8 C+L:
20 MHz

U: 24 TRXs
+L: 4x20 MHz

Note: In the preceding table, the number of carriers and supported LTE bandwidth are indicated
before and after the symbol x. For example, L: 6x10 MHz indicates the number of carriers is six
and the supported LTE bandwidth is 10 MHz.
The total cell access capabilities of a board are the sum of the cell access capability of each CPRI
port on the board. When the cell access capability of a port is maximized, the total cell access
capabilities of the board are restricted. For CPRI MUX on GU or GL dual-mode base stations,
a maximum of two UBRIb boards can be added as required. For CPRI MUX on UL dual-mode
base stations, only one baseband processing board is allowed to provide a CPRI port to deploy
CPRI MUX.

4.2.3 BBU Board Configuration


This section describes the principles for configuring various types of boards in the BBU.

4.2.3.1 GSM BBU Board Configurations


The following table lists the GSM BBU board configurations.
NOTE

For the board specifications, obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description, expand the nodes
Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900, and see the following sections:
l For carrier specifications, see Capacity Specifications.
l For CPRI specifications, see CPRI Specifications.
l For transmission specifications, see Transmission Port Specifications.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-13 GSM BBU board configurations


External
Model

Description

Function

Maxi
mum
Quant
ity

Configuration Principle

GM5D00
GTMU01

GSM Main
Control and
Transport Unit
(4E1&1
electrical
FE&1 optical
FE)

GSM
Transmission &
Timing &
Management
Unit type b
(GTMUb)

A GTMUb must be configured in the following base


stations:
l GBTS
l Separate-MPT multimode base station including
a GBTS

l Provides four
E1s.
l Provides one
FE electrical
port.
l Provides six
CPRI ports.

GM5D0G
TMUC00

GSM Main
Control and
Transport Unit
(4 E1 & 1
electrical FE/
GE & 1 optical
FE/GE)

GTMUc: GSM
transmission &
timing &
management
unit type c

l Provides four
E1s.

In SRAN11.0, the GTMUc is introduced, which


incorporates all functions of the GTMUb, except
that the GTMUc supports neither the UTRPc nor the
GU CPRI panel convergence function and does not
support SingleOM or GTMUc conversion.
The GTMUc is also incorported into SRAN9.0 and
SRAN10.1, with the same restrictions as
SRAN11.0.

l Provides one
FE electrical
port.
l Provides one
FE optical
port.
l Provides six
CPRI ports.
GM5D00
UBRI00

Universal
BaseBand
Radio
Interface
Board (6 CPRI
interface)

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

UBRI:
Universal
baseband radio
interface unit for
GSM
Provides six
CPRI ports.

The UBRI needs to be configured in the following


scenarios:
l More than six CPRI ports are required by GSM.
l RFUs and RRUs are configured, which include
RRUs or RFUs in GSM mode.
l A UBRIb needs to be configured to provide CPRI
ports if the GSM mode is deployed on the UMPT
where co-MPT is applied.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

4.2.3.2 UMTS BBU Board Configurations


NOTE

For the board specifications, obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description, expand the nodes
Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900, and see the following sections:
l For CPRI specifications, see CPRI Specifications.
l For signaling specifications, see Signaling Specifications. For baseband specifications, see Baseband
Specifications.
l For transmission specifications, see Transmission Port Specifications.

The following table lists the UMTS BBU board configurations.


Table 4-14 Configurations of the UMTS main control board
External
Model

Description

Function

Maximum
Number to
Be
Configure
d in a
Single
BBU

Configuration Principle

QWMD00
WMPT00

WCDMA Main
Control and
Transport Unit
(4E1&1
Electrical FE&1
Optical FE)

WMPT:
WCDMA main
control and
transport unit

One WMPT or UMPTa1 must be configured


in a base station of which the supported modes
include UMTS, but the UMPTa1 and WMPT
cannot be configured in the same BBU.

l Provides
four E1s/
T1s.
l Provides
one FE
electrical
port.
l Provides
one FE
optical port.

The main control board can be configured in 1


+1 backup mode for UMTS only not for GU or
UL. When 1+1 backup is used, two main
control boards in the same mode are
configured in one BBU.
Since SRAN7.0 or RAN14.0, the UMPTa1 is
recommended. The UMPTa1 is required when
a newly deployed site meets any of the
following conditions:
1. Support IPSec and PKI features
2. The signaling processing capability
exceeds 170 CNBAP/s.
3. UMTS is served by the leaf BBU, and BBU
interconnection is implemented by
connecting the UCIU and UMPT.
4. There is a need for UMTS-to-LTE
evolution.
5. This board can also be configured when cotransmission is applied and the GSM IPSec
or GSM PKI function is enabled.
In SRAN8.0, the UMPTa1 allows any two or
all triple modes of GSM, UMTS, and LTE to
share one main control board.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Description

Function

Maximum
Number to
Be
Configure
d in a
Single
BBU

WD2D0U
MPT100

Universal Main
Processing and
Transmission
Board(4E1&1
Electrical FE/
GE&1 Optical
FE/GE,
UMPTa1)

UMPTa1:
Universal main
processing and
transmission
board

Configuration Principle

l Provides
four E1s/
T1s.
l Provides
one FE/GE
optical port.
l Provides
one FE/GE
electrical
port.
l Provides
one CI port.

QWMDWB
BPD100

QWMDWB
BPD300

QWMDWB
BPD200

QWMDWB
BPF101

Baseband
Processing Unit
(6Cell,
CE:UL192/
DL192)
Baseband
Processing Unit
(6Cell,
CE:UL256/
DL256)
Baseband
Processing Unit
(6Cell,
CE:UL384/
DL384)
Baseband
Processing Unit
(6Cell,
CE:UL192/
DL256)

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

WCDMA
baseband
processing
board
l A WBBPdx
provides six
CPRI ports.
l A WBBPfx
provides six
CPRI ports
and one
HEI port.

The number of WBBPs to be configured in a


base station depends on the number of cells,
number of uplink and downlink CEs, signaling
processing capability, and number of CPRI
ports to be supported by the base station.
When the DC-HSDPA+MIMO feature is used:
l If the WBBPd, WBBPf1, WBBPf2, or
WBBPf3 is used, each sector must be
configured with one WBBP.
l If the WBBPf4 is used, every three sectors
are configured with one WBBP.
When the feature Independent Demodulation
of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell is
used:
l If the WBBPd2 or WBBPd3 is used, a cell
can be shared by a maximum of six RRUs
(2RX).
l If the WBBPd1 is used, a cell can be shared
by a maximum of three RRUs (2RX).
The WBBPd and WBBPf can be configured in
the same base station.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

External
Model

Description

QWMDWB
BPF201

Baseband
Processing Unit
(6Cell,
CE:UL256/
DL384)

The WBBPd is recommended in versions


earlier than RAN14.0. At a newly deployed
site of SRAN5.0, RAN12.0, or later, the
WBBPb cannot be used.

Baseband
Processing Unit
(6Cell,
CE:UL384/
DL512)

To support DC-HSDPA+MIMO, each sector


must be configured with one WBBPb,
WBBPd, WBBPf1, WBBPf2, or WBBPf3.

QWMDWB
BPF301

QWMDWB
BPF400

Function

4 Product Configuration

Maximum
Number to
Be
Configure
d in a
Single
BBU

Configuration Principle

In RAN14.0, the WBBPf is recommended.

The WBBPf4 supports DC-HSDPA+MIMO


in 3-sector configuration.
When independent demodulation of signals
from multiple RRUs in one cell is enabled, the
WBBPd2, WBBPd3, or WBBPf supports a
maximum of six RRUs in one cell, each RRU
with two receive channels. The WBBPd1 or
WBBPb supports a maximum of three RRUs
in one cell, each RRU with two receive
channels.

Baseband
Processing Unit
(6Cell,
CE:UL512/
DL768)

4.2.3.3 LTE BBU Board Configurations


This section describes the configuration principles for LTE BBU boards.
The following table lists the LTE BBU board configurations.
NOTE

For the board specifications, obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description, expand the nodes
Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900, and see the following sections:
l For CPRI specifications, see CPRI Specifications.
l For signaling specifications, see Signaling Specifications. For baseband specifications, see Baseband
Specifications.
l For transmission specifications, see Transmission Port Specifications.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-15 LTE BBU board configurations


External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Max
imu
m
Qua
ntity

Configuration Principle

WD2D00L
MPT00

LTE Main
Processing
&
Transmissio
n Unit (With
GPS Card)

LMPT: LTE main processing


and transmission unit

One LMPT or UMPTa2 must be


configured in a base station of which the
supported modes include LTE, but the
UMPTa2 and LMPT cannot be configured
in the same BBU.

l Provides two FE/GE


electrical ports.
l Provides two FE/GE
optical ports.

The main control board can be configured


in 1+1 backup mode for LTE only not for
GL or UL.

l Contains a GPS satellite


card.
Universal
Main
Processing
&
Transmissio
n Unit
(4E1&1
Electrical
FE/GE&1
Optical FE/
GE,
UMPTa2)

Universal main processing and


transmission unit type a2
(UMPTa2)

WD2D0L
BBPC00

LTE
Baseband
Processing
Unit C

LTE baseband processing unit


(LBBPc): provides six CPRI
ports.

WD2DLB
BPD100

LTE
Baseband
Processing
Unit D1

LTE baseband processing unit


(LBBPd1): Provides six CPRI
ports and one HEI port.

WD2DLB
BPD101

LTE
Baseband
Processing
Unit D1

LTE baseband processing unit


(LBBPd1): Provides six CPRI
ports and one HEI port.

LTE
Baseband
Processing
Unit D2

LTE baseband processing unit


(LBBPd2): Provides six CPRI
ports and one HEI port.

WD2D00
UMPT01

WD2D0L
BBPD02

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

In LTE or SRAN scenarios, two UMPT


boards can share a signaling resource
pool.
In SRAN8.0, the UMPTa2 allows any two
or all triple modes of GSM, UMTS, and
LTE to share one main control board.

l Provides one FE/GE


electrical port.
l Provides one FE/GE
optical port.
l Provides four E1s/T1s.

The number of LBBPs to be configured in


a base station that supports LTE depends
on the number of cells, bandwidth,
antenna configuration, and number of
CPRI ports to be supported by the base
station.
A BBU in LTE mode is configured with
at least one LBBP, and each LBBP is
configured with a maximum of six RF
modules.
The LBBPc and LBBPd can be configured
in the same base station.
When the LBBPc is configured:
l In SISO, DL 2x2 MIMO, and UL 2x2
MU-MIMO modes, one LBBPc
supports three cells, each with a
scalable bandwidth of
1.4/3/5/10/15/20 MHz.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

WD2D0L
BBPD03

LTE
Baseband
Processing
Unit D3

LTE baseband processing unit


(LBBPd3): Provides six CPRI
ports and one HEI port.

4 Product Configuration

Max
imu
m
Qua
ntity

Configuration Principle

l When DL 4x2 MIMO or UL 4-antenna


receive diversity is used, one LBBPc
supports three cells, each with a
scalable bandwidth of 1.4/3/5/10
MHz, or one cell with a scalable
bandwidth of 15/20 MHz.
l When DL 2x2 MIMO and UL 2x2
MU-MIMO is used, the three cells
supported by a single LBBPc can be
configured with different bandwidth,
for example, 3 x (5 MHz/10 MHz+10
MHz) or (15 MHz+5 MHz+5 MHz).
When the LBBPd is configured:
l When 2x2 MIMO is used, each
LBBPd1 supports a maximum of three
cells with a scalable bandwidth of
1.4/3/5/10/15/20 MHz.
l When 2x2 MIMO, 4x2 MIMO, or 4way receive diversity is used, each
LBBPd2 supports a maximum of three
cells with a scalable bandwidth of
1.4/3/5/10/15/20 MHz.
l The LBBPd2 supports the mixed
configuration of 2T2R and 2T4R/
4T4R with a maximum of three
carriers.
l When 2x2 MIMO is used, each
LBBPd3 supports a maximum of six
cells with a scalable bandwidth of
1.4/3/5/10/15/20 MHz, and the six
cells can use different bandwidth.
WD2DLBBPD100 will no longer be sold
but will gradually be replaced by
WD2DLBBPD101.

4.2.3.4 Common BBU Board Configurations


This section describes the principles for configuring common boards in a BBU.
The following table lists the configuration principles for the power boards, main control boards,
and baseband processing boards in the BBU.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

NOTE

For the board specifications, obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description, expand the nodes
Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900, and see the following sections:
l For CPRI specifications, see CPRI Specifications.
l For signaling specifications, see Signaling Specifications. For baseband specifications, see Baseband
Specifications.
l For transmission specifications, see Transmission Port Specifications.

Table 4-16 Configurations of the power boards, main control boards, and baseband processing boards
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximu
m
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD2M00
0PEU03

HERT BBU
WD2MUPE
UC,-48V
Power and
Environment
interface
Unit

HERT BBU
WD2MUPEUC,-4
8V Power and
Environment
interface Unit

Network deployment scenario: A BBU numbered


02319940 contains one UPEUc by default, which
supports power supply of 360 W. If power backup
or high power (greater than 360 W and less than
or equal to 650 W) is required, a second UPEUc
needs to be configured.

360 W power
module of the
BBU

Capacity expansion scenarios: If one or two


UPEUa boards have been configured before the
capacity expansion, the boards must be replaced
with two UPEUc boards. If one UPEUc board has
been configured before the capacity expansion,
one UPEUc board must be added.
The UPEUa and UPEUc boards cannot be
configured together. The UPEUa and UPEUc use
different designs. When one UPEUa and one
UPEUc are used together, the power supply
capacity ranges from 330 W to 360 W. If the
BBU's total power consumption reaches 360 W
and the UPEUc malfunctions, all power
consumption is carried by the UPEUa, which can
only supply 330 W power, resulting in shutdown
of the entire BBU.

WD2M00
PEIUD2

Function
Module,HE
RT
BBU,WD2
MUPEUD2,
Power and
Environment
interface
Unit(-48V)

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Function
Module,HERT
BBU,WD2MUPE
UD2,Power and
Environment
interface Unit
(-48V)
650 W power
module in the
BBU

Network deployment scenario: A BBU numbered


02310JJE contains one UPEUd by default, which
supports power supply of 650 W. If power backup
(less than or equal to 650 W) is required, a second
UPEUd needs to be configured.
Capacity expansion scenario: Circuit breakers in
existing cabinets need to be changed, so the power
capacity of circuit breakers needs to be considered
(must be greater than or equal to 20 A).

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximu
m
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD2DU
MPTB10
0

Universal
Main
Processing
and
Transmissio
n Board
(4E1&1
Electrical
FE/GE&1
Optical FE/
GE,
UMPTb1)

Universal main
processing and
transmission
board (UMPTb1)

In coMPT/
hybridMPT
single
BBU
scenarios:
1

The UMPTb1 is recommended for GSM mode.

In coMPT/
hybridMPT dual
BBU
scenarios:
2

l If the signaling capacity exceeds 170 CNBAP/


s, the UMPTb1 must be configured.

l Provides four
E1s/T1s.
l Provides one
FE/GE optical
port.
l Provides one
FE/GE
electrical port.
l Provides one
CI port.

SeparateMPT
scenarios:
l Single
BBU:
2
l BBU
interco
nnecti
on: 2

The configuration principles for the UMPTb1 in


UMTS only mode are as follows:
l From RAN14.0 onwards, this board can be
configured to support the UMTS mode.
l The base station needs to support the IPsec and
PKI features.

l If UMTS-to-LTE evolution is required in


future, the UMPTb1 must be configured.
l The UMPTb1 board working in UMTS mode
cannot be configured in the BBU where a
WMPT board has been configured.
The configuration principle for the UMPTb1 in
LTE only mode is as follows: A UMPTb1 in LTE
only mode cannot be configured in the same BBU
as an LMPT.
The configuration principles for the UMPTb1 in
multiple modes are as follows:
l From SRAN8.0 onwards, the UMPTb1 board
is recommended for single-mode and
multimode base stations.
l A UMPTb1 board is mandatory in a co-MPT
multimode base station.
l The base station uses GU or GL cotransmission and needs to support the IPsec
and PKI features for GSM.
l When two BBUs in a separate-MPT
multimode base station are interconnected in
UCIU+UMPT mode, a UMPTb1 must be
configured in BBU 1 (secondary BBU).

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximu
m
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD2D0U
MPTB01

Universal
Main
Processing &
Transmissio
n unit with
4E1 and 2FE/
GE interface
UMPTb2

Universal main
processing and
transmission
board (UMPTb2)

In coMPT/
hybridMPT
single
BBU
scenarios:
1

l The UMPTb2 supports GPS synchronization.


For a newly deployed SRAN or LTE FDD site
that requires GPS clock, a UMPTb2 is
preferentially configured.

l Provides one
FE/GE
electrical port.
l Provides one
FE/GE optical
port.
l Provides four
E1s/T1s.
l Provides one
CI port (for
BBU
interconnectio
n).
l Provides the
GPS clock
port.

l For a newly deployed GSM only (eGBTS) or


UMTS only site that requires GPS lock, a
USCU is preferentially configured or a
UMPTb2 can be configured as the substitute.

In coMPT/
hybridMPT dual
BBU
scenarios:
2
SeparateMPT
scenarios:
l Single
BBU:
2
l BBU
interco
nnecti
on: 2

GM5D0U
BRIB00

Universal
BaseBand
Radio
Interface
Board (6
CPRI
interface,UB
RIb)

Universal
baseband radio
interface unit
(UBRIb)
Provides six CPRI
ports.

In
separateMPT
scenarios:
1
In coMPT
scenarios:
2

A UBRIb needs to be configured in the following


scenarios:
l More than six CPRI ports are required by
GSM.
l RFUs and RRUs are configured, which
include RRUs or RFUs in the GSM mode.
l This board is required and must provide CPRI
ports if the GSM mode is deployed on the
UMPT where co-MPT is applied.
l This board is required and must provide CPRI
ports if the GSM mode is deployed on the
UMPT.

WD2DU
BBPD100

Universal
Baseband
Processing
Unit d1

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

UBBPd1, which
provides six CPRI
ports

GSM: If
the main
control
board is a
GTMUb,
a

From SRAN9.0, the UBBPd is recommended for


UMTS only and LTE only modes. The UBBPd
supports a single mode or multiple modes.
The UBBPd can be configured with the WBBP or
LBBP together.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximu
m
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD2DU
BBPD200

Universal
Baseband
Processing
Unit d2

UBBPd2, which
provides six CPRI
ports

During capacity expansion, it is recommended


that the existing baseband processing boards be
fully configured and the UBBPd be configured if
the required capacity is not reached.

WD2DU
BBPD300

Universal
Baseband
Processing
Unit d3

UBBPd3, which
provides six CPRI
ports

Universal
Baseband
Processing
Unit d4

UBBPd4, which
provides six CPRI
ports

Universal
Baseband
Processing
Unit d5

UBBPd5, which
provides six CPRI
ports

maximum
of five
baseband
processing
boards can
be
configure
d. If the
main
control
board is a
UMPT, a
maximum
of six
baseband
processing
boards can
be
configure
d.

WD2DU
BBPD400

WD2DU
BBPD500

In GBSS16.0, the UBBP must be configured


when any of the following conditions is met in
GSM only scenarios:
l The VAMOS FR, VAMOS II, 4-Antenna
Receive Diversity, Antenna Frequency
Hopping, and MICC features need to be
supported.
l The AAU3902 can work in GSM mode.
UMTS only mode:
l From RAN16.0, the UBBP is recommended
for UMTS only mode.
LTE only mode:
l In eRAN7.0, the following UBBP boards
support LTE only mode: UBBPd3, UBBPd4,
UBBPd5, and UBBPd6.

In UMTS
l The sector configuration principles for the
or LTE
UBBPd4, UBBPd5, and UBBPd6 in LTE only
mode, a
mode are as follows:
maximum
A UBBPd4 cannot be configured with
of six
2T2R, 2T4R, and 4T4R sectors together.
UBBPd1
boards can
A UBBPd5 supports a maximum of six
be
2T2R cells.
configure
In versions earlier than eRAN7.0 SPC210,
d.
a UBBPd5 cannot be configured with 2R
and 4R cells together. In eRAN7.0 SPC210
and later versions, a UBBPd5 can be
configured with a maximum of three cells
that are combined by 2R and 4R cells.
In versions earlier than eRAN7.0 SPC210,
a UBBPd6 cannot be configured with 2R
and 4R cells together. In eRAN7.0 SPC210
and later version, a UBBPd6 can be
configured with a maximum of three 2T2R
cells and three 2T4R/4T4R cells together.
When a UBBPd6 is configured with 2T2R
sectors, it supports a maximum of six cells.
When a UBBPd6 is configured with 2T4R
or 4T4R sectors, it supports a maximum of
six cells.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

Model

Descriptio
n

Function

WD2DU
BBPD600

Universal
Baseband
Processing
Unit d6

UBBPd6, which
provides six CPRI
ports

4 Product Configuration

Maximu
m
Quantity

Configuration Principle

l In eRAN8.0, a UBBPd cannot be configured


2R and 4R cells together.
In co-BBP multimode scenarios:
l To support GU mode, the UBBPd1, UBBPd2,
UBBPd3, UBBPd4, UBBPd5, or UBBPd6
must be configured.
l To support GL mode, the UBBPd3, UBBPd4,
UBBPd5, or UBBPd6 must be configured.
l To support UL mode, the UBBPd6 must be
configured.
l To support GUL mode, the UBBPd6 must be
configured.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

4.2.3.5 Clock and Transmission Board Configurations


This section describes the principles for configuring clock and transmission boards in a BBU.
In SRAN6.0, three modes can be deployed on two BBUs. For example, GSM and UMTS are
deployed on one BBU and LTE mode is deployed on the other BBU, or GSM and LTE are
deployed on one BBU and UMTS mode is deployed on the other BBU. The two BBUs cannot
share transmission resources or clock signals. Configurations of LTE mode in GU+L mode are
the same as those of LTE only mode. In GL+U mode, UMTS configurations are the same as the
configurations in UMTS only mode.
In SRAN7.0, two BBUs can be interconnected to support three modes, such as G&U+L(G) and
G&L+U(G). In addition, co-clock and co-transmission are supported in BBU interconnection
scenarios. In SRAN7.0, the UMPT is introduced to support the mainstream solution of cotransmission. The UTRPc is used for the alternative solution of co-transmission.
In RAN14.0, the UTRPa board is introduced (used only for UMTS) to replace the UTRP3 and
UTRP4 boards, which will enter the EOM phase.
In SRAN8.0, co-MPT is introduced. In co-MPT scenarios, co-transmission is recommended.
The following table lists the principles for configuring clock and transmission boards in a BBU.
NOTE

For details about the specifications of each board, see the following contents in 3900 Series Base Station
Technical Description: Product Specifications > Technical Specifications of the BBU3900. For details
about the transmission specifications, see Transmission Specifications.

Table 4-17 Principles for configuring clock and transmission boards in a BBU
Externa
l Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maxi
mum
Quan
tity

Configuration Principle

WD2D0
0USCU
00

Universal
Satellite
Clock
Unit

USCUb11,
clock board used
for LTE,
without a
satellite card

This board needs to be configured for the LTE mode when


any of the following conditions is met:
l This board is required when a BITS reference clock
source is used for the LTE mode.
l This board is required when the LTE mode is not
configured with a main control board that has a built-in
GPS satellite card but requires the GPS or OTDOA
function.
l This board is required when the 1PPS/1PPS+TOD or
RGPS clock is used for the LTE mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Externa
l Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maxi
mum
Quan
tity

Configuration Principle

WD2D0
USCU3
00

Universal
Synchroni
zation
Clock
Unit
Supportin
g GPS and
BITS

USCUb14,
clock board with
a built-in u-blox
GPS satellite
card

This board is optional and can be configured from SRAN7.0,


GBSS14.0, or RAN14.0 onwards.
l This board is required when GPS or BITS clock
synchronization is used for the GSM or UMTS mode.
l This board is required when a BITS reference clock
source is used for the LTE mode.
l This board is required when the LTE mode is not
configured with a main control board that has a built-in
GPS satellite card but requires the GPS or OTDOA
function.
l This board is required when the UMTS mode requires
the OTDOA function.
l In GU/GL/UL dual-mode base station, this board is
required when GPS or BITS clock synchronization is
used for GSM or UMTS, or when BITS clock
synchronization is used for LTE.
l This board is required in a GU/GL/UL dual-mode base
station where the Common Clock feature is activated and
GPS or BITS clock synchronization is used.
l This board is required in either a single- or multi-mode
base station when the 1PPS/1PPS+TOD or RGPS clock
is used for the LTE mode.

WD2D0
0UCIU0
0

GM5D
UTRPB
400

Universal
Cascading
Interface
Unit

GSM
TDM over
E1/T1
Interface
Unit

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

UCIU for BBU


interconnection.
It provides one
port for
connecting to
the root BBU
and five ports
for connecting
to the leaf
BBUs.

Transmission
extension board
for GSM
(UTRPb4)

For a separate-MPT triple-mode base station, BBU 0 needs


to be configured with the UCIU if the two BBUs are
interconnected by connecting the UCIU in one BBU and the
UMPT in the other BBU.
In GU dual mode, the UCIU board is required when a cabinet
used by a 3900 series base station and a cabinet used by a
3012 series base station are installed side by side. In this case,
the GTMUb board is mandatory and the UCIU board cannot
be used for BBU interconnection.
This board is required when four to eight E1s/T1s need to be
provided for GSM.

Provides eight
E1s/T1s over
TDM

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Externa
l Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maxi
mum
Quan
tity

Configuration Principle

QWMD
0UTRP
300

Iub ATM
Interface
Unit (8
E1s)

Transmission
extension board
for UMTS
(UTRP3)

This board is required when the E1/T1 ports on the main


control and transmission board in UMTS mode support
ATM transmission and more than four E1s/T1s over ATM
ports are required.

This board is required when the E1 ports on the main control


and transmission board in UMTS mode support IP
transmission and more than four E1s over IP are required.

This board is required when two or more FE electrical ports


or any GE electrical port is used by UMTS.

Provides eight
E1s over ATM.
QWMP
0UTRP
400

Iub IP
Interface
Unit (8
E1s)

Transmission
extension board
for UMTS
(UTRP4)
Provides eight
E1s over IP.

QWMP
0UTRP
900

QWMP
0UTRP
200

QWMD
0UTRP
600

Iub IP
Interface
Unit (4
FE/GE
Electrical
ports)

Transmission
extension board
for UMTS
(UTRP9)

Iub IP
Interface
Unit (2
FE/GE
Optical
ports)

Transmission
extension board
for UMTS
(UTRP2)

Iub ATM
Interface
Unit (1
Unchanne
lized
STM-1)

Transmission
extension board
for UMTS
(UTRP6)

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Each board provides four FE/GE electrical ports, and the


number of the boards to be configured is determined by the
required number of FE/GE electrical ports.

Provides four
FE/GE electrical
ports.
4

This board is required when two or more FE optical ports or


any GE optical port is used by UMTS.
In SRAN7.0 or RAN14.0, the UTRPc is configured by
default.

Provides two
FE/GE optical
ports.
4

This board is required when unchannelized STM-1


transmission is used by UMTS.

Provides one
unchannelized
STM-1 port.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Externa
l Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maxi
mum
Quan
tity

Configuration Principle

QWMD
0UTRP
A00

Universal
Transmiss
ion
Resource
Processin
g Unit
(8E1/T1)

Transmission
extension board
for UMTS
(UTRPa)
Provides eight
ATM over E1 or
IP over E1.

l This board is required when the E1/T1 ports on the main


processing and transmission board in UMTS mode
support ATM or IP transmission and more than four E1/
T1 ports are required.
l Each board provides eight E1/T1 ports, and the number
of the boards to be configured is determined by the
required number of E1/T1 ports.
l The ATM transmission and IP transmission cannot be
used together.
l The delivered UTRPa board supports the plug-and-play
function in RAN14.0 and RAN14.1, and the delivered
board cannot be customized. From RAN15.0 onwards,
this board is supported by using software.

QWMD
0UTRP
C00

Universal
Transmiss
ion
Resource
Processin
g Unit (4
Electrical
FE/GE
ports & 2
Optical
FE/GE
ports)

Transmission
extension board
for UMTS
(UTRPc)

l Works in
GSM,
UMTS, or
LTE mode.

l This board is required when a base station that uses triplemode co-transmission is not configured with a UMPT,
or is configured with a UMPT but requires expansion of
the transmission capability.

l Provides
four FE/GE
electrical
ports.

l This board is required when IPSec needs to be supported


for GSM.
l This board is required when IPSec is used for UMTS and
no UMPT is configured for UMTS.

l Provides two
FE/GE
optical ports.

l This board is required when GE ports are required by


GSM.

QCUBB
BULIG
01

Lighting
Arrester
Box

SLPU: surge
protection box
for transmission

WD2P0
0UELP0
0

Universal
E1/T1
Lighting
Protection
Unit

UELP: universal
E1/T1 lightning
protection unit

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Optional. This board is introduced in SRAN7.0, GBSS14.0,


RAN14.0, and eRAN3.0. The GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes
can share one UTRPc board. From SRAN7.0 onwards, the
UTRPc board is recommended for increasing FE/GE ports
in all modes. When the GTMUa board is used, the UTRPc
board cannot be used for transmission capacity expansion.

l Each surge protection box is configured with a maximum


of four surge protection boards.
l A BTS3900AL cabinet contains one surge protection
box. One piece needs to be configured when more than
four surge protection boards are required.
l Every four E1 ports are configured with one package for
surge protection.
l A BTS3900AL AC cabinet contains two E1 surge
protection packages. This board needs to be configured
when more than two E1 surge protection packages are
required.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Externa
l Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maxi
mum
Quan
tity

Configuration Principle

WD2P0
UFLPB
00

Universial
FE/GE
Lighting
Protection
Unit

UFLPb:
universal FE/GE
lightning
protection unit

l Every two FE/GE electrical ports are configured with one


package for surge protection.

WD2P0
UFLPC
00

Universial
FE/GE
Lighting
Protection
Unit

UFLPc:
universal FE/GE
lightning
protection unit

l A BTS3900AL AC cabinet contains one FE/GE surge


protection package. This board needs to be configured
when more than one FE/GE surge protection package is
required.
l Every two FE/GE electrical ports are configured with one
package for surge protection.
l A BTS3900AL AC cabinet contains one FE/GE surge
protection package. This board needs to be configured
when more than one FE/GE surge protection package is
required.

4.2.4 CPRI Networking Configuration


The following table lists the CPRI networking configuration principles.
NOTE

The CPRI networking configuration principles apply to the BBU3900.

Table 4-18 CPRI networking configuration principles


Application
Scenarios

Networking
Topology

Configuration Principle

Multimode
RF modules
in separateMPT mode

Dual-star

The dual-star topology is recommended.

CPRI MUX

l The WBBPf/UBBPd_U and GTMUb must be configured in GU CPRI MUX


mode. The WBBPf/UBBPd_U must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that
process both GSM and UMTS signals. The WBBPf or UBBPd_U must be
configured in slot 2 or 3.
l The LBBPd/UBBPd_L and GTMUb must be configured in GL CPRI MUX
mode. The LBBPd/UBBPd_L must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that
process both GSM and LTE signals. The LBBPd or UBBPd_L must be
configured in slot 2 or 3.
l The LBBPd/UBBPd_L and WBBPf/UBBPd_U must be configured in UL
CPRI MUX mode. The LBBPd/UBBPd_L or WBBPf/UBBPd_U must
connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both UMTS and LTE signals.
Baseband boards that connect to fiber optic cables must be configured in slot
2 or 3.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

Application
Scenarios

Networking
Topology

Configuration Principle

Multimode
RF modules
in co-MPT
mode

CPRI MUX

The CPRI MUX topology is recommended.

4 Product Configuration

l The WBBPf/UBBPd_U and UBRIb must be configured in GU CPRI MUX


mode. The UBRIb must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both
GSM and UMTS signals. The WBBPf or UBBPd_U must be configured in
slot 2 or 3. The UBRIb must be configured in slot 0 or 1.
l The LBBPd/UBBPd_L and UBRIb must be configured in GL CPRI MUX
mode. The UBRIb must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both
GSM and LTE signals. The LBBPd or UBBPd_L must be configured in slot
2 or 3. The UBRIb must be configured in slot 1.
l The WBBPf/UBBPd_U and LBBPd/UBBPd_L must be configured in UL
CPRI MUX mode. The WBBPf/UBBPd_U or LBBPd/UBBPd_L must
connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both UMTS and LTE signals.
Baseband boards that connect to fiber optic cables must be configured in slot
2 or 3.
Load sharing
(in transition
scenarios)

l In the GU SDR load-sharing networking topology, the WBBPa/WBBPb/


WBBPd/WBBPf/UBBPd UMTS and UBRI/UBRIb are configured. Both the
GSM interface board and UMTS baseband board are connected to CPRI fiber
optic cables.
l In the GL SDR load-sharing networking topology, the LBBPc/LBBPd/
UBBPd LTE and UBRI/UBRIb are configured. Both the GSM interface
board and LTE baseband board are connected to CPRI fiber optic cables.
l In the UL SDR load-sharing networking topology, the WBBPa/WBBPb/
WBBPd/WBBPf/UBBPd UMTS and LBBPc/LBBPd/UBBPd LTE are
configured. Both the UMTS and LTE baseband boards are connected to
CPRI fiber optic cables.

4.3 RF Module Configuration


This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules in a 3900 series base station.

4.3.1 RF Module Configuration


The type of RF modules to be used is determined by the frequency band. Each sector is configured
with at least one RF module. The number of RF modules to be configured depends on the number
of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
The following table lists the relationships between sectors and RF modules.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-19 RF module configuration


Configuration Scenario

RF Module Configuration

Transmit diversity

Two TX channels are required for one sector:

2x2 MIMO

l Two 1T modulesa are configured for one sector.

MIMO Prime

l One 2Tb or 4T module is configured for one sector.

DL 4x2 MIMO

Four TX channels are required for one sector:

DL 4x4 MIMO

l Two 2T modules are configured for one sector.


l One 4T module is configured for one sector.
NOTE
1T modules cannot be used in this configuration scenario.

UL 4-way Diversity

Four RX channels are required for one sector:

UL 2x4 multi-user MIMO


(MU-MIMO)

l Two 2R modules are configured for one sector.


l One 4R module is configured for one sector.

a: In versions earlier than SRAN6.0, when two 1T RF modules are configured to support MIMO, the two RF
modules must be cascaded by connecting CPRI ports. From SRAN6.0 onwards, it is recommended that the two
RF modules be cascaded by connecting CPRI ports.
b: In UMTS mode, two 2T RF modules in one sector support UL 4-way diversity but do not support carrier or
power expansion. If RFUs and RRUs are used in the same base station, they cannot operate in the same frequency
band.

The application scenarios supported by RF modules vary according to the working mode of the
RF modules, as shown in the following table.
Table 4-20 RF module configuration restrictions
Mode

Restriction

GSM

l The DRFUs support UL 4-way diversity.


l From GBSS16.0/SRAN9.0, the UBBPd is introduced to process GSM baseband signals and
support UL 4-way diversity.
l The DRFU RRU3004, and 2T RF modules support the transmit diversity.
l When 4-way receive diversity is used, two DRFUs must be configured.
l Each DRFU or RRU3004 supports only one TRX when PBT or transmit diversity is used. Each
cell served by the DRFU or RRU3004 supports a maximum of two TRXs. When transmit
diversity is used, the maximum number of carriers supported by each GSM RF module with
two transmit channels decreases by half.
l The DRFU and RRU3004 do not support PBT when transmit diversity is used.
l When UL 4-way diversity is used, the DRFU does not support TMA. When 4-way diversity
is used, each cell supports a maximum of two TRXs.
NOTE
DRFUs and RRU3004 modules do not support eGBTS.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Mode

Restriction

UMTS

l RFUs support transmit diversity, 2x2 MIMO, and UL 4-way diversity.


l RRUs support DL transmit diversity, 2x2 MIMO, and UL 4-way diversity.

LTE

The following configuration scenarios are supported: 2x2 MIMO, UL 4-way diversity, DL 4x2
MIMO, UL 2x4 MU-MIMO, and DL 4x4 MIMO. When DL 4x2 MIMO or DL 4x4 MIMO is
used, two cascaded 2T RF modules or one 4T RF module is required. 1T RF modules do not
support DL 4x2 MIMO or DL 4x4 MIMO.

NOTE
When the SingleOM solution is used, GSM RF signals do not support transmit diversity.

4.3.2 RF Modules Working at Band 8 (900 MHz)


This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 8 (900 MHz
frequency band).

RFUs Working at Band 8 (900 MHz Frequency Band)


The following table lists RFU configurations.
Table 4-21 RFU configurations
Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

l WD5M9EMRFU05
(applying to the
BTS3900, BTS3900A,
and BTS3900L)

MRFUe
for MultiMode
900MHz
EGSM

MRFUe working at the


900 MHz EGSM
frequency band:

l At a
BTS3900
/
BTS3900
A/
BTS3900
L site: 12

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

l WD5P9EMRFU04
(applying to the
BTS3900AL)

l The module has one


transmit channel
and its maximum
output power is
1x125 W.
l UL: 880 MHz to
915 MHz; DL: 925
MHz to 960 MHz

l At a
BTS3900
AL site:
18

l It can work in GSM,


UMTS, LTE
(supported only in
multimode base
stations), GU SDR,
or GL SDR mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

l WD5M9EMRFU03
(applying to the
BTS3900, BTS3900A,
and BTS3900L)

MRFUd
for MultiMode
900MHz
EGSM

This module is no
longer sold after GA of
the enhanced MRFUd.
MRFUd working at the
900 MHz EGSM
frequency band:

l At a
BTS3900
/
BTS3900
A/
BTS3900
L site: 12

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

l WD5P9EMRFU03
(applying to the
BTS3900AL)

l The module has two


transmit channels
and its maximum
output power is
2x80 W.

l At a
BTS3900
AL site:
18

l UL: 880 MHz to


915 MHz; DL: 925
MHz to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTS, LTE, GU
SDR, or GL SDR
mode.
l WD5M9PMRFU03
(applying to the
BTS3900, BTS3900A,
and BTS3900L)
l WD5P9PMRFU02
(applying to the
BTS3900AL)

MRFUd
for MultiMode
900MHz
PGSM

This module is no
longer sold after GA of
the enhanced MRFUd.
MRFUd working at the
900 MHz PGSM
frequency band:
l The module has two
transmit channels
and its maximum
output power is
2x80 W.

l At a
BTS3900
/
BTS3900
A/
BTS3900
L site: 12
l At a
BTS3900
AL site:
18

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

l UL: 890 MHz to


915 MHz; DL: 935
MHz to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTS, LTE, GU
SDR, or GL SDR
mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

l WD5M9EMRFU07
(applying to the
BTS3900, BTS3900A,
and BTS3900L)

RF Unit V2
for MultiMode
900MHz
EGSM

MRFU V2 working at
the 900 MHz EGSM
frequency band:

l At a
BTS3900
/
BTS3900
A/
BTS3900
L site: 12

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

l WD5P9EMRFU05
(applying to the
BTS3900AL)

l The module has one


transmit channel
and its maximum
output power is
1x80 W.
l UL: 880 MHz to
915 MHz; DL: 925
MHz to 960 MHz

l At a
BTS3900
AL site:
18

l It can work in GSM,


UMTS, LTE, or GL
SDR mode.
l WD5M9PMRFU01
(applying to the
BTS3900, BTS3900A,
and BTS3900L)
l WD5P9PMRFU01
(applying to the
BTS3900AL)

RF Unit V2
for MultiMode
900MHz
PGSM

This module will no


longer be sold. MRFU
V2 working at the 900
MHz PGSM frequency
band:
l The module has one
transmit channel
and its maximum
output power is
1x80 W.
l UL: 890 MHz to
915 MHz; DL: 935
MHz to 960 MHz

l At a
BTS3900
/
BTS3900
A/
BTS3900
L site: 12
l At a
BTS3900
AL site:
18

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

l It can work in GSM,


UMTS, LTE, GU
SDR, or GL SDR
mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

l WD5M9PMRFU02
(applying to the
BTS3900, BTS3900A,
and BTS3900L)

RF Unit V2
for MultiMode
900MHz
PGSM

MRFU V2 working at
the 900 MHz PGSM
frequency band:

l At a
BTS3900
/
BTS3900
A/
BTS3900
L site: 12

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

l WD5P9PMRFU02
(applying to the
BTS3900AL)

l The module has one


transmit channel
and its maximum
output power is
1x80 W.
l UL: 890 MHz to
915 MHz; DL: 935
MHz to 960 MHz

l At a
BTS3900
AL site:
18

l It can work in GSM,


UMTS, LTE, GU
SDR, or GL SDR
mode.
l WD5M9EMRFU02
(applying to the
BTS3900, BTS3900A,
and BTS3900L)
l WD5P9EMRFU02
(applying to the
BTS3900AL)

RF Unit V2
for MultiMode
900MHz
EGSM

MRFU V2 working at
the 900 MHz EGSM
frequency band:
l The module has one
transmit channel
and its maximum
output power is
1x80 W.
l UL: 880 MHz to
915 MHz; DL: 925
MHz to 960 MHz

l At a
BTS3900
/
BTS3900
A/
BTS3900
L site: 12
l At a
BTS3900
AL site:
18

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

l It can work in GSM,


UMTS, LTE, GU
SDR, or GL SDR
mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

l WD5M9EMRFU06
(applying to the
BTS3900, BTS3900A,
and BTS3900L)

MRFUd
for MultiMode
900MHz
EGSM

Enhanced MRFUd
working at the 900
MHz EGSM frequency
band:

l At a
BTS3900
/
BTS3900
A/
BTS3900
L site: 12

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

l WD5M9EMRFU13
(applying to the
BTS3900AL)

l The module has two


transmit channels
and its maximum
output power is
2x80 W.
l UL: 880 MHz to
915 MHz; DL: 925
MHz to 960 MHz

l At a
BTS3900
AL site:
18

l It can work in GSM,


UMTS, LTE, GU
SDR, or GL SDR
mode.
l WD5M9PMRFU06
(applying to the
BTS3900, BTS3900A,
and BTS3900L)
l WD5M9PMRFU13
(applying to the
BTS3900AL)

MRFUd
for MultiMode
900MHz
PGSM

Enhanced MRFUd
working at the 900
MHz PGSM frequency
band:
l The module has two
transmit channels
and its maximum
output power is
2x80 W.
l UL: 890 MHz to
915 MHz; DL: 935
MHz to 960 MHz

l At a
BTS3900
/
BTS3900
A/
BTS3900
L site: 12
l At a
BTS3900
AL site:
18

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

l It can work in GSM,


UMTS, LTE, GU
SDR, or GL SDR
mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

l GM5M9PGRFU01
(applying to the
BTS3900, BTS3900A,
and BTS3900L)

GRFU V2
900MHz
PGSM

This module will no


longer be sold. Multicarrier RFU working at
the 900 MHz PGSM
frequency band:

l At a
BTS3900
/
BTS3900
A/
BTS3900
L site: 12

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

l GM5P9PGRFU01
(applying to the
BTS3900AL)

l The module has one


transmit channel
and its maximum
output power is
1x80 W.
l UL: 890 MHz to
915 MHz; DL: 935
MHz to 960 MHz

l At a
BTS3900
AL site:
18

l It can work in GSM


mode.
l GM5M9EGRFU02
(applying to the
BTS3900, BTS3900A,
and BTS3900L)
l GM5P9EGRFU02
(applying to the
BTS3900AL)

GRFU V2
900MHz
EGSM

This module will no


longer be sold. Multicarrier RFU working at
the 900 MHz EGSM
frequency band:
l The module has one
transmit channel
and its maximum
output power is
1x80 W.
l UL: 880 MHz to
915 MHz; DL: 925
MHz to 960 MHz

l At a
BTS3900
/
BTS3900
A/
BTS3900
L site: 12
l At a
BTS3900
AL site:
18

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

l It can work in GSM


mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

l GM5M9PGRFU02
(applying to the
BTS3900, BTS3900A,
and BTS3900L)

GRFU V2
900MHz
PGSM

Multi-carrier RFU
working at the 900
MHz PGSM frequency
band:

l At a
BTS3900
/
BTS3900
A/
BTS3900
L site: 12

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

l The module has one


transmit channel
and its maximum
output power is
1x80 W.

l GM5P9PGRFU02
(applying to the
BTS3900AL)

l UL: 890 MHz to


915 MHz; DL: 935
MHz to 960 MHz

l At a
BTS3900
AL site:
18

l It can work in GSM


mode.
l GM5M9EGRFU04
(applying to the
BTS3900, BTS3900A,
and BTS3900L)

GRFU V2
900MHz
EGSM

Multi-carrier RFU
working at the 900
MHz EGSM frequency
band:
l The module has one
transmit channel
and its maximum
output power is
1x80 W.

l GM5P9EGRFU04
(applying to the
BTS3900AL)

l UL: 880 MHz to


915 MHz; DL: 925
MHz to 960 MHz

l At a
BTS3900
/
BTS3900
A/
BTS3900
L site: 12
l At a
BTS3900
AL site:
18

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

l It can work in GSM


mode.
GM5M9EDRFU00
(applying to the BTS3900,
BTS3900A, and
BTS3900L)

DRFU
900MHz
EGSM

DRFU working with a


35 MHz bandwidth at
the 900 MHz EGSM
band:
l UL: 880 MHz to
915 MHz; DL: 925
MHz to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM
mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

l At a
BTS3900
/
BTS3900
A/
BTS3900
L site: 12
l At a
BTS3900
AL site:
18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

62

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

GM5M9PDRFU00

DRFU
900MHz
PGSM

DRFU working with a


25 MHz bandwidth at
the 900 MHz PGSM
band:

l At a
BTS3900
/
BTS3900
A/
BTS3900
L site: 12

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

(applying to the BTS3900,


BTS3900A, and
BTS3900L)

l UL: 890 MHz to


915 MHz; DL: 935
MHz to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM
mode.

l At a
BTS3900
AL site:
18

RRUs Working at Band 8 (900 MHz Frequency Band)


The following table lists RRU configurations.
Table 4-22 RRU configurations
Model

Description

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

WD5M9E39
5900

RRU3959 for
Multi-mode 900
MHz EGSM

RRU3959, blade RRU


working at the 900 MHz
EGSM band:

DBS3900: 12

The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.

l The module has two


transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x60 W.

BTS3900C: 1
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L: 6
BTS3900AL: 9

l UL: 880 MHz to 915


MHz; DL: 925 MHz
to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTS, LTE, GU, or
GL mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

For detailed
specifications, see
Technical
Specifications of
RRUs

63

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

WD5M9P392
900

RRU3929 for
Multi-Mode
900MHz PGSM

RRU3929 working at the


900 MHz PGSM
frequency band:

At a DBS3900 site: 12

The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.

l The module has two


transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x60 W.
l UL: 890 MHz to 915
MHz; DL: 935 MHz
to 960 MHz

At a BTS3900C site: 1
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site: 6
At a BTS3900AL site:
9

l It can work in GSM,


UMTS, LTE, GU
SDR, or GL SDR
mode.
WD5M9E39
2931

RRU3929 for
Multi-Mode
900MHz EGSM

RRU3929 working at the


900 MHz EGSM
frequency band:
l The module has two
transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x60 W.
l UL: 880 MHz to 915
MHz; DL: 925 MHz
to 960 MHz

DBS3900: 12
At a BTS3900C site: 1
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site: 6
At a BTS3900AL site:
9

l It can work in GSM,


UMTS, LTE, GU
SDR, or GL SDR
mode.
WD5M9E39
2800

RRU3928 for
Multi-Mode
900MHz EGSM

RRU3928 working at the


900 MHz EGSM
frequency band:
l The module has two
transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x40 W.
l UL: 880 MHz to 915
MHz; DL: 925 MHz
to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTS, LTE, GU
SDR, or GL SDR
mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

At a DBS3900 site: 12
At a BTS3900C site: 1
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets: 6
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.D cabinets: 9

For detailed
specifications, see
Technical
Specifications of
RRUs.

The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.
For detailed
specifications, see
Technical
Specifications of
RRUs.

The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.
For detailed
specifications, see
Technical
Specifications of
RRUs.

At a BTS3900AL site:
9

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

GM6M9PDR
RU00

RRU3004
900MHz PGSM

RRU3004 working at the


900 MHz PGSM
frequency band:

At a DBS3900 site: 12

The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.

l UL: 890 MHz to 915


MHz; DL: 935 MHz
to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM
mode.

GM6M9EDR
RU00

RRU3004
900MHz EGSM

RRU3004 working at the


900 MHz EGSM
frequency band:

For detailed
specifications, see
Technical
Specifications of
RRUs.
At a DBS3900 site: 12

l UL: 880 MHz to 915


MHz; DL: 925 MHz
to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM
mode.

GM6M9PGR
RU04

RRU3008
900MHz PGSM

RRU3008 V2 working at
the 900 MHz PGSM
frequency band:

For detailed
specifications, see
Technical
Specifications of
RRUs.
At a DBS3900 site: 12

l UL: 890 MHz to 915


MHz; DL: 935 MHz
to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM
mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.
For detailed
specifications, see
Technical
Specifications of
RRUs.

65

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

GM6M9EGR
RU06

RRU3008
900MHz EGSM

RRU3008 V2 working at
the 900 MHz EGSM
frequency band:

At a DBS3900 site: 12

The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.

l UL: 880 MHz to 915


MHz; DL: 925 MHz
to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM
mode.

WD5M9PM
RRU04

RRU V2 for
Multi-Mode
900MHz PGSM

RRU3908 V2 working at
the 900 MHz PGSM
frequency band:
l UL: 890 MHz to 915
MHz; DL: 935 MHz
to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTS, LTE, GU
SDR, or GL SDR
mode.

For detailed
specifications, see
Technical
Specifications of
RRUs.
At a DBS3900 site: 12
At a BTS3900C site: 1
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets: 6
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.D cabinets: 9

The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.
For detailed
specifications, see
Technical
Specifications of
RRUs.

At a BTS3900AL site:
9
WD5M9EM
RRU03

RRU V2 for
Multi-Mode
900MHz EGSM

RRU3908 V2 working at
the 900 MHz EGSM
frequency band:
l UL: 880 MHz to 915
MHz; DL: 925 MHz
to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTS, LTE, GU
SDR, or GL SDR
mode.

At a DBS3900 site: 12
At a BTS3900C site: 1
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets: 6
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.D cabinets: 9

The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.
For detailed
specifications, see
Technical
Specifications of
RRUs.

At a BTS3900AL site:
9

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

WD5M9P392
600

RRU3926 for
Multi-mode
900MHz PGSM

RRU3926 working at the


900 MHz PGSM
frequency band:

At a DBS3900 site: 12

The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.

l The module has one


transmit channel and
its maximum output
power is 1x80 W.
l UL: 890 MHz to 915
MHz; DL: 935 MHz
to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTS, or GU SDR
mode.

At a BTS3900C site: 1
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets: 6
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.D cabinets: 9

For detailed
specifications, see
Technical
Specifications of
RRUs.

At a BTS3900AL site:
9
WD5M9E39
2600

RRU3926 for
Multi-mode
900MHz EGSM

RRU3926 working at the


900 MHz EGSM
frequency band:
l The module has one
transmit channel and
its maximum output
power is 1x80 W.
l UL: 880 MHz to 915
MHz; DL: 925 MHz
to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTS, or GU SDR
mode.

At a DBS3900 site: 12
At a BTS3900C site: 1
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets: 6
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.D cabinets: 9

The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.
For detailed
specifications, see
Technical
Specifications of
RRUs.

At a BTS3900AL site:
9

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

WD5M9P393
600

RRU3936 for
Multi-mode
900MHz PGSM

RRU3936, blade RRU


working at the 900 MHz
PGSM frequency band:

At a DBS3900 site: 12

The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.

l The module has one


transmit channel and
its maximum output
power is 1x80 W.
l UL: 890 MHz to 915
MHz; DL: 935 MHz
to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTS, GU SDR, or
GL SDR mode.

At a BTS3900C site: 1
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets: 6
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.D cabinets: 9

For detailed
specifications, see
Technical
Specifications of
RRUs.

At a BTS3900AL site:
9
WD5M9E39
3600

RRU3936 for
Multi-mode
900MHz EGSM

RRU3936, blade RRU


working at the 900 MHz
EGSM frequency band:
l The module has one
transmit channel and
its maximum output
power is 1x80 W.
l UL: 880 MHz to 915
MHz; DL: 925 MHz
to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTS, GU SDR, or
GL SDR mode.

At a DBS3900 site: 12
At a BTS3900C site: 1
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets: 6
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.D cabinets: 9

The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.
For detailed
specifications, see
Technical
Specifications of
RRUs.

At a BTS3900AL site:
9

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

WD5M9P393
800

RRU3938 for
Multi-Mode
900MHz PGSM

RRU3938, blade RRU


working at the 900 MHz
PGSM frequency band:

At a DBS3900 site: 12
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets: 6

The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.D cabinets: 9

For detailed
specifications, see
Technical
Specifications of
RRUs.

l The module has two


transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x40 W.
l UL: 890 MHz to 915
MHz; DL: 935 MHz
to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTS, LTE, GU
SDR, or GL SDR
mode.
WD5M9E39
3800

RRU3938 for
Multi-Mode
900MHz EGSM

RRU3938, blade RRU


working at the 900 MHz
EGSM frequency band:
l The module has two
transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x40 W.
l UL: 890 MHz to 915
MHz; DL: 935 MHz
to 960 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTS, LTE, GU
SDR, or GL SDR
mode.

At a BTS3900AL site:
9
At a DBS3900 site: 12
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets: 6

The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.D cabinets: 9

For detailed
specifications, see
Technical
Specifications of
RRUs.

At a BTS3900AL site:
9

4.3.3 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)


This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 1800 MHz.

RFUs Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)


The following table lists the RFU configuration.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-23 RFU configuration


External Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximu
m
Quantity

Configuration Principle

l WD5M18MRFU32
(applicable to
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)

MRFUe
for MultiMode
1800MHz

Multimode RF
module working at
the 1800 MHz full
band:

At a
BTS3900/
BTS3900A
/
BTS3900L
site: 12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power. For
details about the specifications,
see Technical Specifications of
RFUs.

l The module has


one transmit
channel and its
maximum output
power is 1x125 W.

l WD5P18MRFU32
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

BTS3900A
L cabinet:
18

l UL: 1710 MHz to


1785MHz; DL:
1805MHz to 1880
MHz
l It can work in
GSM, UMTS,
LTE, GU SDR, or
GL SDR mode.
l WD5M18MRFU05
(applicable to
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)
l WD5P18MRFU05
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

MRFUd
for MultiMode
1800 MHz

This module is no
longer sold after GA
of the enhanced
MRFUd. Multimode
RF modules working
at the 1800 MHz full
band:
l The module has
two transmit
channels and its
maximum output
power is 2x80 W.

At a
BTS3900/
BTS3900A
/
BTS3900L
site: 12
BTS3900A
L cabinet:
18

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power. For
details about the specifications,
see Technical Specifications of
RFUs.

l UL: 1710 MHz to


1785MHz; DL:
1805MHz to 1880
MHz
l It can work in
GSM, UMTS,
LTE, GU SDR, or
GL SDR mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximu
m
Quantity

Configuration Principle

l WD5M18MRFU07
(applicable to
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)

MRFUd
for MultiMode
1800MHz

Enhanced MRFUd
working at the 1800
MHz band:

At a
BTS3900/
BTS3900A
/
BTS3900L
site: 12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power. For
details about the specifications,
see Technical Specifications of
RFUs.

l WD5MP18MRFU15
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

l The module has


two transmit
channels and its
maximum output
power is 2x80 W.
l UL: 1710 MHz to
1785MHz; DL:
1805MHz to 1880
MHz

BTS3900A
L cabinet:
18

l It can work in
GSM, UMTS,
LTE, GU SDR, or
GL SDR mode.
WD5M18MRFU10

MRFUd
for MultiMode
1800 MHz

MRFUd V6 working
at 1800 MHz:
l The module has
two transmit
channels and its
maximum output
power is 2x80 W.
l UL: 1710 MHz to
1785 MHz; DL:
1805 MHz to 1880
MHz

At a
BTS3900/
BTS3900A
/
BTS3900L
site: 12
BTS3900A
L cabinet:
18

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power. For
details about the specifications,
see Technical Specifications of
RFUs.

l It can work in
GSM, LTE, or GL
mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximu
m
Quantity

Configuration Principle

l WD5M18MRFU03
(applicable to
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)

RF Unit
V2 for
MultiMode
1800 MHz
A

This module will no


longer be sold. MRFU
working at segment A
of the 1800 MHz
band:

At a
BTS3900/
BTS3900A
/
BTS3900L
site: 12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power. For
details about the specifications,
see Technical Specifications of
RFUs.

l WD5P18MRFU03
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

l The module has


one transmit
channel and its
maximum output
power is 1x80 W.

BTS3900A
L cabinet:
18

l UL: 1710 MHz to


1770 MHz; DL:
1805 MHz to 1875
MHz
l It can work in
GSM, UMTS,
LTE, GU SDR, or
GL SDR mode.
l WD5M18MRFU04
(applicable to
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)
l WD5P18MRFU04
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

RF Unit
V2 for
MultiMode
1800 MHz
B

This module will no


longer be sold. MRFU
working at segment B
of the 1800 MHz
band:
l The module has
one transmit
channel and its
maximum output
power is 1x80 W.

At a
BTS3900/
BTS3900A
/
BTS3900L
site: 12
BTS3900A
L cabinet:
18

l UL: 1725 MHz to


1785 MHz; DL:
1820 MHz to 1880
MHz
l It can work in
GSM, UMTS,
LTE, GU SDR, or
GL SDR mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximu
m
Quantity

l WD5M18MRFU06
(applicable to
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)

RF Unit
V2 for
MultiMode
1800 MHz

Multimode RF
module working at
the 1800 MHz full
band:

At a
BTS3900/
BTS3900A
/
BTS3900L
site: 12

l WD5P18MRFU06
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

l The module has


one transmit
channel and its
maximum output
power is 1x80 W.

Configuration Principle

BTS3900A
L cabinet:
18

l UL: 1710 MHz to


1785 MHz; DL:
1805 MHz to 1880
MHz
l It can work in
GSM, UMTS,
LTE, GU SDR, or
GL SDR mode.
l GM5M18GRFU03
(applicable to
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)
l GM5P18GRFU03
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

GRFU V2
1800 MHz
A

This module will no


longer be sold. Multicarrier RFU working
at segment A of the
1800 MHz band:
l The module has
one transmit
channel and its
maximum output
power is 1x80 W.

At a
BTS3900/
BTS3900A
/
BTS3900L
site: 12
BTS3900A
L cabinet:
18

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power. For
details about the specifications,
see Technical Specifications of
RFUs.

l UL: 1710 MHz to


1770 MHz; DL:
1805 MHz to 1875
MHz
l It can work in
GSM mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximu
m
Quantity

l GM5M18GRFU04
(applicable to
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)

GRFU V2
1800 MHz
B

This module will no


longer be sold. Multicarrier RFU working
at segment B of the
1800 MHz band:

At a
BTS3900/
BTS3900A
/
BTS3900L
site: 12

l GM5P18GRFU04
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

l The module has


one transmit
channel and its
maximum output
power is 1x80 W.

Configuration Principle

BTS3900A
L cabinet:
18

l UL: 1725 MHz to


1785 MHz; DL:
1820 MHz to 1880
MHz
l It can work in
GSM mode.
l GM5M18GRFU05
(applicable to
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)

GRFU V2
1800M

Multi-carrier RFU
working at the 1800
MHz full band:
l The module has
one transmit
channel and its
maximum output
power is 1x80 W.

l GM5P18GRFU05
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

l UL: 1710 MHz to


1785 MHz; DL:
1805 MHz to 1880
MHz

At a
BTS3900/
BTS3900A
/
BTS3900L
site: 12
BTS3900A
L cabinet:
18

l It can work in
GSM mode.
GM5M18DRFU00
(applicable to BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L)

DRFU
1800 MHz

DRFU working at
1800 MHz:
l Supporting the
full 1800 MHz
band
l UL: 1710 MHz to
1785 MHz; DL:
1805 MHz to 1880
MHz

At a
BTS3900/
BTS3900A
/
BTS3900L
site: 12
BTS3900A
L cabinet:
18

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power. For
details about the specifications,
see Technical Specifications of
RFUs.

l It can work in
GSM mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

RRUs Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)


The following table lists the RRU configuration.
Table 4-24 RRU configuration
External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

WD5M183
95300

RRU3953
for MultiMode
1800MHz

Blade RRU working at the


1800 MHz full band:

At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be


12
configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
At a BTS3900C
of carriers, and output power.
site: 1

l The module has two


transmit channels and
four receive channels
and its maximum output
power is 2x80 W. When
working in GO mode,
the module's maximum
output power is 2x60 W.
When working in
another mode, its
maximum output power
is 2x80 W.

Configuration Principle

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site: 6

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

In GSM mode, this RRU


supports the following
features: VAMOS FR,
VAMOS I&II, antenna
frequency hopping,
multidimensional interference
cancellation combining
(MICC), and 4-Way Receive
Diversity (4WD).

l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785


MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to
1880 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
LTE, or GL mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

WD5M183
953W0

RRU3953w
for MultiMode 1800
MHz

Multimode blade RRU


working at the 1800 MHz
full band:

At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be


12
configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
At a BTS3900C
of carriers, and output power.
site: 1

l The module has two


transmit channels and
four receive channels
and its maximum output
power is 2x80 W. When
working in GO mode,
its maximum output
power is 2x60 W. When
working in another
mode, its maximum
output power is 2x80 W.

Configuration Principle

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site: 6

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

In GSM mode, this RF module


supports the following
features: VAMOS FR,
VAMOS I&II, antenna
frequency hopping,
multidimensional interference
cancellation combining
(MICC), and 4-Way Receive
Diversity (4WD).

l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785


MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to
1880 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
LTE, or GL mode.
l IBW is 75 MHz. You
need to apply for this
module, and it can be
used only after the PIM
interference analysis is
performed for this
module.
WD5M183
92931

RRU3929
for MultiMode 1800
MHz

Multimode RF module
working at the 1800 MHz
full band:
l The module has two
transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x60 W.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785
MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to
1880 MHz

At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be


12
configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
At a BTS3900C
of carriers, and output power.
site: 1
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site: 6

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

l It can work in GSM,


UMTS, LTE, GU SDR,
or GL SDR mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

WD5M183
93900

RRU3939
for MultiMode 1800
MHz

RRU3939, blade RRU


working at the 1800 MHz
full band:

At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be


12
configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
At a BTS3900/
of carriers, and output power.
BTS3900A/

l The module has two


transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x60 W.

BTS3900L site: 6
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

Configuration Principle

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785


MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to
1880 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
LTE, GU SDR, or GL
SDR mode.
WD5M183
95900

RRU3959
for MultiMode
1800MHz

RRU3959, blade RRU


working at the 1800 MHz
full band:
l The module has two
transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x60 W.

At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be


12
configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
At a BTS3900/
of carriers, and output power.
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site: 6
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785


MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to
1880 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
LTE, or GL mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

WD5M183
959W0

RRU3959w
for MultiMode
1800MHz

RRU3959w, blade RRU


working at the 1800 MHz
full band:

At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be


12
configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
At a BTS3900/
of carriers, and output power.
BTS3900A/

l The module has two


transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x60 W.

BTS3900L site: 6
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

Configuration Principle

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785


MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to
1880 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
LTE, or GL mode.
l IBW is 75 MHz. You
need to apply for this
module, and it can be
used only after the PIM
interference analysis is
performed for this
module.
WD5M183
92800

RRU3928
for MultiMode 1800
MHz

Multimode RF module
working at the 1800 MHz
full band:
l The module has two
transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x40 W.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785
MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to
1880 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTS, LTE, GU SDR,
or GL SDR mode.

At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be


12
configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
At a BTS3900C
of carriers, and output power.
site: 1
At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.B)
or (Ver.C) cabinets:
6

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
cabinets: 9
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

GM6M18
DRRU00

RRU3004
1800 MHz

RRU3004 working at the


1800 MHz band:
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785
MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to
1880 MHz

At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be


12
configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
of carriers, and output power.

l It can work in GSM


mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

78

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

WD5M18
GRRU00

RRU3008
1800 MHz A

RRU3008 V1 working at
the lower 45 MHz segment
of the 1800 MHz band:

At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be


12
configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
of carriers, and output power.

l UL: 1710 MHz to 1755


MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to
1850 MHz

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

l It can work in GSM


mode.
WD5M18
GRRU01

RRU3008
1800 MHz B

RRU3008 V1 working at
the higher 45 MHz segment
of the 1800 MHz band:
l UL: 1740 MHz to 1785
MHz; DL: 1835 MHz to
1880 MHz

At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be


12
configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
of carriers, and output power.
For detailed specifications, see
Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

l It can work in GSM


mode.
WD5M18
MRRU01

RRU for
Multi-Mode
1800 MHz A

RRU3908 V1, multimode


RF module working at the
lower 45 MHz segment of
the 1800 MHz band:

At a DBS3900 site: Select this package based on


12
the frequency band
requirements.
At a BTS3900C

l UL: 1710 MHz to 1755


MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to
1850 MHz

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.B)
or (Ver.C) cabinets:
6

l It can work in GSM,


LTE, or GL SDR mode.
The UMTS mode is
supported in terms of
hardware.
WD5M18
MRRU02

RRU for
Multi-Mode
1800 MHz B

Configuration Principle

RRU3908 V1, multimode


RF module working at the
lower 45 MHz segment of
the 1800 MHz band:
l UL: 1740 MHz to 1785
MHz; DL: 1835 MHz to
1880 MHz

site: 1

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
of carriers, and output power.
For detailed specifications, see
Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
cabinets: 9
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

l It can work in GSM,


LTE, or GL SDR mode.
The UMTS mode is
supported in terms of
hardware.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

WD5M183
92600

RRU3926
for MultiMode 1800
MHz

RRU3926 working at the


1800 MHz full band:

At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be


12
configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
At a BTS3900C
of carriers, and output power.
site: 1

l The module has one


transmit channel and its
maximum output power
is 1x80 W.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785
MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to
1880 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTE, GU SDR, or GL
SDR mode.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.B)
or (Ver.C) cabinets:
6

Configuration Principle

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
cabinets: 9
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

WD5M183
93600

RRU3936
Multi-Mode
for 1800
MHz

RRU3936, multimode
blade RRU working at the
1800 MHz full band:
l The module has one
transmit channel and its
maximum output power
is 1x80 W.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785
MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to
1880 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTE, GU SDR, or GL
SDR mode.

At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be


12
configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
At a BTS3900C
of carriers, and output power.
site: 1
At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.B)
or (Ver.C) cabinets:
6

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
cabinets: 9
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

WD5M183
93800

RRU3938
for MultiMode 1800
MHz

RRU3938 working at the


1800 MHz full band:

At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be


12
configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
At a site using
of carriers, and output power.
BTS3900/

l The module has two


transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x40 W.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785
MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to
1880 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTS, LTE, GU SDR,
or GL SDR mode.

BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.B)
or (Ver.C) cabinets:
6

Configuration Principle

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
cabinets: 9
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9
At a BTS3900C
site: 1

WD5M2P3
952M0

RRU3952m
for MultiMode
1800MHz

The RRU3952m is a
multimode RF module
supporting 1800 MHz and
2100 MHz inter-frequency
mutual aid. It supports the
1.8 GHz 2T4R or 1.8 GHz
2T2R+2.1 GHz 2R
configuration. Its
maximum output power is
2x60 W. It supports the
GO/LO/GL mode and
works at any of the
following frequency
ranges: 1.8 GHz: UL 1710
to 1785 MHz; DL 1805 to
1880 MHz; 2.1 GHz: UL
1920 to 1980 MHz.

BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L:6
BTS3900AL:9
DBS3900:12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
of carriers, and output power.
For detailed specifications, see
Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

4.3.4 RF Modules Working at Band 5 (850 MHz)


This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 850 MHz.

RFUs Working at Band 5 (850 MHz)


The following table lists the RFU configuration.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-25 RFU configuration


External Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

l WD5M85MRFU00
(applicable to BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L)

RF Unit V2
for MultiMode 850
MHz

MRFU V2 working
at the 850 MHz band:

BTS3900
cabinet,
BTS3900A, or
BTS3900L
cabinet: 12

Select this package based


on the frequency band
requirements.

l WD5P85MRFU00
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

l The module has


one transmit
channel and its
maximum output
power is 1x80 W.

BTS3900AL
cabinet: 18

l UL: 824 MHz to


846.5 MHz; DL:
869 MHz to 891.5
MHz
l It can work in
GSM, UMTE, or
GU SDR mode.
l QWMMWRFU8500
(applicable to BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L)
l QWMPWRFU8500
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

RF Unit for
WCDMA
850MHz
(80W)

WRFU working at
segment A of the 850
MHz band:
l The module has
one transmit
channel and its
maximum output
power is 1x80 W.

BTS3900
cabinet,
BTS3900A, or
BTS3900L
cabinet: 12
BTS3900AL
cabinet: 18

l UL: 824 MHz to


835MHz; DL:
869 MHz to 880
MHz

The number of packages


to be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output
power. For details about
the specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

The number of packages


to be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output
power. For details about
the specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

l It can work in
UMTS mode.

RRUs Working at Band 5 (850 MHz)


The following table lists the RRU configuration.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-26 RRU configuration


External
Model

Descript
ion

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD5M85
393600

RRU3936
for MultiMode 850
MHz

RRU3936, multimode
blade RRU working at the
850 MHz full band: The
module has one transmit
channel and its maximum
output power is 1x80 W.

At a DBS3900
site: 12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of carriers,
and output power.

UL: 824MHz to 849


MHz; DL: 869 MHz to
894 MHz
It can work in GSM,
UMTE, or GU SDR
mode.

At a BTS3900C
site: 1
At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.B) or
(Ver.C)
cabinets: 6

For the specifications, see Technical


Specifications of the RRU.
For detailed specifications, see
Technical Specifications of RRUs.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.D)
cabinets: 9
At a
BTS3900AL
site: 9

WD5M85
395200

RRU3952
for MultiMode 850
MHz

Blade RRU, RRU3952


working at the 850 MHz
frequency band:
l The module has two
transmit channels and
four receive channels
and its maximum
output power is 2x60
W.

At a DBS3900
site: 12

Select this package based on the


frequency band requirements.

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site:
6

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of carriers,
and output power.

At a
BTS3900AL
site: 9

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of RRUs.

l UL: 824 MHz to 849


MHz; DL: 869 MHz to
894 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTS, LTE, GU
SDR, GL SDR, or UL
SDR mode.
l It supports four
carriers and four
antennas.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Descript
ion

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD5M85
394200

RRU3942
for MultiMode 850
MHz

RRU3942 working at 850


MHz:

At a DBS3900
site: 12

Select this package based on the


frequency band requirements.

l The module has two


transmit channels and
four receive channels
and its maximum
output power is 2x60
W.

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site:
6

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of carriers,
and output power.

At a
BTS3900AL
site: 9

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of RRUs.

RRU3801E working at
850 MHz:

At a DBS3900
site: 12

Select this package based on the


frequency band requirements.

l UL: 824 MHz to 834


MHz; DL: 869 MHz to
879 MHz

At a BTS3900C
site: 1

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of carriers,
and output power.

l UL: 824 MHz to 849


MHz; DL: 869 MHz to
894 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTE, or GU SDR
mode.
l It supports four
carriers and four
antennas.
QWEMR
RU5A300

RRU for
WCDMA
850 MHz
(40 W)

l It can work in UMTS


mode.
l It supports a
maximum of two
carriers. The
maximum output
power is 40 W.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.B) or
(Ver.C)
cabinets: 6

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of RRUs.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.D)
cabinets: 9
At a
BTS3900AL
site: 9

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Descript
ion

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

QWEMR
RU50200

RRU for
WCDMA
850 MHz
(60 W)

RRU3804 working at 850


MHz:

At a DBS3900
site: 12

Select this package based on the


frequency band requirements.

l UL: 824 MHz to 849


MHz; DL: 869 MHz to
894 MHz

At a BTS3900C
site: 1

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of carriers,
and output power.

l It supports a
maximum of four
carriers. The
maximum output
power is 60 W.
l It can work in UMTS
mode.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.B) or
(Ver.C)
cabinets: 6

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of RRUs.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.D)
cabinets: 9
At a
BTS3900AL
site: 9

WD5M85
MRRU02

RRU V2
for MultiMode 850
MHz

RRU3908 V2, multimode


RF module working at
850 MHz:
l UL: 824 MHz to 849
MHz; DL: 869 MHz to
894 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTE, or GU SDR
mode.

At a DBS3900
site: 12

Select this package based on the


frequency band requirements.

At a BTS3900C
site: 1

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of carriers,
and output power.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.B) or
(Ver.C)
cabinets: 6

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of RRUs.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.D)
cabinets: 9
At a
BTS3900AL
site: 9

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Descript
ion

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

GM6M85
GRRU00

RRU3008
850 MHz

RRU3008 V1 working at
850 MHz:

At a DBS3900
site: 12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of carriers,
and output power.

l UL: 824 MHz to 849


MHz; DL: 869 MHz to
894 MHz

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of RRUs.

l It can work in GSM


mode.

4.3.5 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz)


This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 1900 MHz.

RFUs Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz)


The following table lists the RFU configuration.
Table 4-27 RFU configuration
External Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

l WD5M19MRFU01
(applicable to
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)

RF Unit
for MultiMode
1900 MHz
A

MRFU V1 working at
segment A of the 1900
MHz band:

BTS3900
cabinet,
BTS3900A,
or
BTS3900L
cabinet: 12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
of carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RFUs.

l WD5P19MRFU01
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

l The module has


one transmit
channel and its
maximum output
power is 1x80 W.
l UL: 1850 MHz to
1890 MHz; DL:
1930 MHz to 1970
MHz

At a
BTS3900AL
site: 18

l It can work in
GSM, UMTE, or
GU SDR mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximum
Quantity

l WD5M19MRFU02
(applicable to
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)

RF Unit
for MultiMode
1900 MHz
B

MRFU V1 working at
segment B of the 1900
M band:

BTS3900
cabinet,
BTS3900A,
or
BTS3900L
cabinet: 12

l WD5P19MRFU02
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

l The module has


one transmit
channel and its
maximum output
power is 1x80 W.
l UL: 1870 MHz to
1910 MHz; DL:
1950 MHz to 1990
MHz

Configuration Principle

At a
BTS3900AL
site: 18

l It can work in
GSM, UMTE, or
GU SDR mode.
l GM5M19GRFU00
(applicable to
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)
l GM5P19GRFU00
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

GRFU
1900MHz
A

Multi-carrier RF
module working at
segment A of the 1900
MHz band:
l The module has
one transmit
channel and its
maximum output
power is 1x80 W.

BTS3900
cabinet,
BTS3900A,
or
BTS3900L
cabinet: 12
At a
BTS3900AL
site: 18

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
of carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RFUs.

l UL: 1850 MHz to


1890 MHz; DL:
1930 MHz to 1970
MHz
l It can work in
GSM mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximum
Quantity

l GM5M19GRFU01
(applicable to
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)

GRFU
1900MHz
B

Multi-carrier RF
module working at
segment B of the 1900
MHz band:

BTS3900
cabinet,
BTS3900A,
or
BTS3900L
cabinet: 12

l The module has


one transmit
channel and its
maximum output
power is 1x80 W.

l GM5P19GRFU01
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

Configuration Principle

At a
BTS3900AL
site: 18

l UL: 1870 MHz to


1910 MHz; DL:
1950 MHz to 1990
MHz
l It can work in
GSM mode.

RRUs Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz)


The following table lists the RRU configuration.
Table 4-28 RRU configuration
External
Model

Description

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

GM6M19
GRRU00

RRU3008
1900 MHz A

RRU3008 V1 working at the


lower 40 MHz segment of the
1900 MHz band:

At a DBS3900
site: 12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by
the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and output
power.

l UL: 1850 MHz to 1890


MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to
1970 MHz

For detailed specifications,


see Technical Specifications
of RRUs.

l It can work in GSM mode.


GM6M19
GRRU01

RRU3008
1900 MHz B

RRU3008 V1 working at the


higher 40 MHz segment of
the 1900 MHz band:

At a DBS3900
site: 12

l UL: 1870 MHz to 1910


MHz; DL: 1950 MHz to
1990 MHz
l It can work in GSM mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by
the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and output
power.
For detailed specifications,
see Technical Specifications
of RRUs.

88

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Description

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD5M19
MRRU01

RRU for
Multi-Mode
1900 MHz A

RRU3908 V1, multimode RF


module working at the lower
40 MHz segment of the 1900
MHz band:

At a DBS3900
site: 12

Select this package based on


the frequency band
requirements.

l UL: 1850 MHz to 1890


MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to
1970 MHz

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site: 6

l It can work in GSM,


UMTE, or GU SDR
mode.

At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

WD5M19
MRRU02

RRU for
Multi-Mode
1900 MHz B

At a BTS3900C
site: 1

RRU3908 V1, multimode RF


module working at the higher
40 MHz segment of the 1900
MHz band:

For detailed specifications,


see Technical Specifications
of RRUs.
The number of packages to be
configured is determined by
the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and output
power.

l UL: 1870 MHz to 1910


MHz; DL: 1950 MHz to
1990 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTE, or GU SDR
mode.
QWEMR
RU20300

RRU for
WCDMA
1900 MHz (40
W)

RRU3801E working at 1900


MHz:

At a DBS3900
site: 12

l UL: 1850 MHz to 1910


MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to
1990 MHz

At a BTS3900C
site: 1

l It supports a maximum of
two carriers. The
maximum output power is
40 W.
l It can work in UMTS
mode.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.B) or (Ver.C)
cabinets: 6

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by
the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and output
power.
For detailed specifications,
see Technical Specifications
of RRUs.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.D) cabinets:
9
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Description

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

QWEMR
RU20200

RRU for
WCDMA
1900 MHz (60
W)

RRU3804 working at 1900


MHz:

At a DBS3900
site: 12

l UL: 1850 MHz to 1910


MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to
1990 MHz

At a BTS3900C
site: 1

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by
the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and output
power.

l It supports a maximum of
four carriers. The
maximum output power is
60 W.
l It can work in UMTS
mode.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.B) or (Ver.C)
cabinets: 6

For detailed specifications,


see Technical Specifications
of RRUs.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.D) cabinets:
9
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

WD5M19
394200

RRU3942 for
Multi-Mode
1900 MHz

RRU3942 working at 1900


MHz:

At a DBS3900
site: 12

l The module has two


transmit channels and
four receive channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x60 W.

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site: 6
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

l It supports a maximum of
two sectors in 1T2R
mode.

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by
the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and output
power.
For detailed specifications,
see Technical Specifications
of RRUs.

l UL: 1850 MHz to 1910


MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to
1990 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTS, LTE, GU SDR,
GL SDR, or UL SDR
mode.
l It supports four carriers
and four antennas.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Description

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD5M19
393600

RRU3936 for
Multi-Mode
1900 MHz

RRU3936, multimode blade


RRU working at the 1900
MHz full band:

At a DBS3900
site: 12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by
the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and output
power.

The module has one transmit


channel and its maximum
output power is 1x80 W.
UL: 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz;
DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz
It can work in GSM, UMTS,
LTE, GU SDR, GL SDR, or
UL SDR mode.

At a BTS3900C
site: 1
At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.B) or (Ver.C)
cabinets: 6

For the specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
the RRU

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.D) cabinets:
9
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

WD5M19
395300

RRU3953 for
Multi-Mode
1900 MHz

Blade RRU, RRU3953


working at the 1900 MHz
frequency band:
l It works in 2T4R mode
and provides the
maximum output power
of 2x80 W. When
working in GO mode, its
maximum output power is
2x60 W or 40 W+80 W.
When working in another
mode, its maximum
output power is 2x80 W.

At a DBS3900
site: 12
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site: 6
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by
the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and output
power.
For detailed specifications,
see Technical Specifications
of RRUs

l It supports a maximum of
two sectors in 1T2R
mode.
l UL: 1850 MHz to 1910
MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to
1990 MHz
l It can work in GSM,
UMTS, LTE, GU SDR,
GL SDR, or UL SDR
mode.
l It supports four carriers
and four antennas.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

4.3.6 RF Modules Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz)


This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 2100 MHz.

RFUs Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz)


The following table lists the RFU configuration.
Table 4-29 RFU configuration
External Model

Description

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

l QWMMWRFUA100
(applicable to
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)

WRFUa for
WCDMA
2100 MHz
(1x100 W)

RF module working at
2100 MHz:

BTS3900
cabinet,
BTS3900A, or
BTS3900L
cabinet: 12

The number of packages


to be configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power. For details
about the specifications,
see Technical
Specifications of RFUs.

l QWMPWRFUA100
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

l The module has


one transmit
channel and its
maximum output
power is 1x100 W.
l UL: 1920 MHz to
1980 MHz; DL:
2110 MHz to 2170
MHz

At a
BTS3900AL
site: 18

l It can work in
UMTS mode.
l QWMMWRFU8101
(applicable to
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)
l QWMPWRFU2100
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

WRFUe for
WCDMA
2100 MHz
(2x80 W)

RF module working at
2100 MHz:
l The module has
two transmit
channels and its
maximum output
power is 2x80 W.
l UL: 1920 MHz to
1980 MHz; DL:
2110 MHz to 2170
MHz

BTS3900
cabinet,
BTS3900A, or
BTS3900L
cabinet: 12
At a
BTS3900AL
site: 18

The number of packages


to be configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power. For details
about the specifications,
see Technical
Specifications of RFUs.

l It can work in
UMTS mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External Model

Description

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

l QWMMWRFU6100
(applicable to
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)

WRFUd for
WCDMA
2100MHz
(2x60W)

RF module working at
2100 MHz:

BTS3900
cabinet,
BTS3900A, or
BTS3900L
cabinet: 12

The number of packages


to be configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power. For details
about the specifications,
see Technical
Specifications of RFUs.

l QWMPWRFU6100
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

l The module has


two transmit
channels and its
maximum output
power is 2x60 W.
l UL: 1920 MHz to
1980 MHz; DL:
2110 MHz to 2170
MHz

At a
BTS3900AL
site: 18

l It can work in
UMTS mode.
l QWMMWRFU8102
(applicable to
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)
l QWMPWRFU1101
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

RF Unit for
WCDMA
2100 MHz
(80 W)

RF module working at
the 2100 MHz
frequency band
(enhanced module of
the WRFU whose
output power is 80
W):
l The module has
one transmit
channel and its
maximum output
power is 1x80 W.

BTS3900
cabinet,
BTS3900A, or
BTS3900L
cabinet: 12
At a
BTS3900AL
site: 18

The number of packages


to be configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power. For details
about the specifications,
see Technical
Specifications of RFUs.

l UL: 1920 MHz to


1980 MHz; DL:
2110 MHz to 2170
MHz
l It can work in
UMTS mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External Model

Description

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

l QWMMWRFU4100
(applicable to
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)

RF Unit for
WCDMA
2100 MHz
(40 W)

RF module working at
2100 MHz:

BTS3900
cabinet,
BTS3900A, or
BTS3900L
cabinet: 12

The number of packages


to be configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power. For details
about the specifications,
see Technical
Specifications of RFUs.

l QWMPWRFU4100
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

l The module has


one transmit
channel and its
maximum output
power is 1x40 W.
l UL: 1920 MHz to
1980 MHz; DL:
2110 MHz to 2170
MHz

At a
BTS3900AL
site: 18

l It can work in
UMTS mode.
l QWMMWRFU8100
(applicable to
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)
l QWMPWRFU8100
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

RF Unit for
WCDMA
2100 MHz
(80 W)

RF module working at
2100 MHz:
l The module has
one transmit
channel and its
maximum output
power is 1x80 W.
l UL: 1920 MHz to
1980 MHz; DL:
2110 MHz to 2170
MHz

BTS3900
cabinet,
BTS3900A, or
BTS3900L
cabinet: 12
At a
BTS3900AL
site: 18

The number of packages


to be configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power. For details
about the specifications,
see Technical
Specifications of RFUs.

RRUs Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz)


The following table lists the RRU configuration.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-30 RRU configuration


External
Model

Description

Function

Maximum Quantity

Configuration
Principle

WD5M21
382400

RRU3824 for
WCDMA 2100
MHz (60 W)

RRU3824, blade RRU


working at 2100 MHz:

At a DBS3900 site: 12

l The module has one


transmit channel and
its maximum output
power is 1x60 W.

At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.B) or
(Ver.C) cabinets: 6

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.

l UL: 1920 MHz to


1980 MHz; DL: 2110
MHz to 2170 MHz

At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
cabinets: 9

l It can work in UMTS


mode.

WD5M21
382401

RRU3824 for
WCDMA 2100
MHz (60 W)

Enhanced RRU3824,
blade RRU working at
2100 MHz:
l The module has one
transmit channel and
its maximum output
power is 1x60 W.

WD5M21
382600

RRU3826 for
WCDMA 2100
MHz (80 W)

For detailed specifications,


see Technical
Specifications of RRUs.

At a BTS3900AL site:
9
At a DBS3900 site: 12
At a BTS3900C site: 1
At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.B) or
(Ver.C) cabinets: 6

l UL: 1920 MHz to


1980 MHz; DL: 2110
MHz to 2170 MHz

At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
cabinets: 9

l It can work in UMTS


mode.

At a BTS3900AL site:
9

RRU3826, blade RRU


working at 2100 MHz:

At a DBS3900 site: 12

l The module has one


transmit channel and
its maximum output
power is 1x80 W.

At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.B) or
(Ver.C) cabinets: 6

l UL: 1920 MHz to


1980 MHz; DL: 2110
MHz to 2170 MHz

At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
cabinets: 9

l It can work in UMTS


mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

At a BTS3900C site: 1

At a BTS3900C site: 1

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For detailed specifications,
see Technical
Specifications of RRUs.

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For detailed specifications,
see Technical
Specifications of RRUs.

At a BTS3900AL site:
9

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Description

Function

Maximum Quantity

Configuration
Principle

WD5M21
382601

RRU3826 for
WCDMA 2100
MHz (80 W)

Enhanced RRU3826,
blade RRU working at
2100 MHz:

At a DBS3900 site: 12

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.

l The module has one


transmit channel and
its maximum output
power is 1x80 W.

WD5M21
383200

RRU3832 for
WCDMA 2100
MHz (2x60 W,
2T4R)

At a BTS3900C site: 1
At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.B) or
(Ver.C) cabinets: 6

l UL: 1920 MHz to


1980 MHz; DL: 2110
MHz to 2170 MHz

At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
cabinets: 9

l It can work in UMTS


mode.

At a BTS3900AL site:
9

RRU3832, blade RRU


working at 2100 MHz:

At a DBS3900 site: 12

l The module has two


transmit channels and
four receive channels
and its maximum
output power is 2x60
W.

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site: 6
At a BTS3900AL site:
9

For detailed specifications,


see Technical
Specifications of RRUs.

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For detailed specifications,
see Technical
Specifications of RRUs.

l UL: 1920 MHz to


1980 MHz; DL: 2110
MHz to 2170 MHz
l It can work in UMTS
mode.
NOTE
The RRU3832 supports
two receive channels in
RAN12.0 and RAN13.0
and supports four carriers
in RAN12.0.

WD5M21
383900

RRU3839 for
WCDMA 2100
MHz (2x60 W)

RRU3839, blade RRU


working at the 2100 MHz
frequency band:
l The module has two
transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x60 W.
l UL: 1920 MHz to
1980 MHz; DL: 2110
MHz to 2170 MHz

At a DBS3900 site: 12
At a BTS3900C site: 1
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site: 6
At a BTS3900AL site:
9

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For detailed specifications,
see Technical
Specifications of RRUs.

l It can work in UMTS


mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Description

Function

Maximum Quantity

Configuration
Principle

WD5M21
383800

RRU3838 for
WCDMA 2100
MHz (2x40 W)

RRU3838, blade RRU


working at 2100 MHz:

At a DBS3900 site: 12

l The module has two


transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x40 W.

At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.B) or
(Ver.C) cabinets: 6

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.

l UL: 1920 MHz to


1980 MHz; DL: 2110
MHz to 2170 MHz

At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
cabinets: 9

l It can work in UMTS


or LTE mode.
NOTE
The RRU3838 only
supports four carriers in
RAN12.0.

WD5M21
382900

RRU for
WCDMA 2100
MHz (2x60 W)

RRU3829 working at
2100 MHz:
l The module has two
transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x60 W.
l UL: 1920 MHz to
1980 MHz; DL: 2110
MHz to 2170 MHz

At a BTS3900C site: 1

At a BTS3900AL site:
9

At a DBS3900 site: 12
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site: 6
At a BTS3900AL site:
9
At a BTS3900C site: 1

l It can work in UMTS


mode.
NOTE
The RRU3829 only
supports four carriers in
RAN12.0.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

For detailed specifications,


see Technical
Specifications of RRUs.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For detailed specifications,
see Technical
Specifications of RRUs.
It supports a maximum of
six UMTS carriers and its
total output power is 2x60
W.

97

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Description

Function

Maximum Quantity

Configuration
Principle

WD5M21
MRRU00

RRU for
WCDMA 2100
MHz (2x40 W)

RRU3828 working at
2100 MHz:

At a DBS3900 site: 12

l The module has two


transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x40 W.

At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.B) or
(Ver.C) cabinets: 6

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.

l UL: 1920 MHz to


1980 MHz; DL: 2110
MHz to 2170 MHz

At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
cabinets: 9

l It can work in UMTS


mode.
NOTE
The RRU3828 only
supports four carriers in
RAN12.0.

QWEMR
RU10300

RRU for
WCDMA 2100
MHz (40 W)

At a BTS3900C site: 1

For detailed specifications,


see Technical
Specifications of RRUs.

At a BTS3900AL site:
9

RRU3801E working at
2100 MHz, which has
entered the EOM phase:
l UL: 1920 MHz to
1980 MHz; DL: 2110
MHz to 2170 MHz
l It supports a
maximum of two
carriers. The
maximum output
power is 40 W.

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For detailed specifications,
see Technical
Specifications of RRUs.

l It can work in UMTS


mode.
QWEMR
RU10200

RRU for
WCDMA 2100
MHz (60 W)

RRU3804 working at
2100 MHz, which has
entered the EOM phase:
l UL: 1920 MHz to
1980 MHz; DL: 2110
MHz to 2170 MHz
l It supports a
maximum of four
carriers. The
maximum output
power is 60 W.

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For detailed specifications,
see Technical
Specifications of RRUs.

l It can work in UMTS


mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

External
Model

Description

Function

QWEMR
RU10700

RRU for
WCDMA 2100
MHz (80 W)

RRU3806 working at
2100 MHz, which has
entered the EOM phase:

4 Product Configuration

Maximum Quantity

l UL: 1920 MHz to


1980 MHz; DL: 2110
MHz to 2170 MHz
l It supports a
maximum of four
carriers. The
maximum output
power is 80 W.

Configuration
Principle
The number of packages to
be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For detailed specifications,
see Technical
Specifications of RRUs.

l It can work in UMTS


mode.
QWEMR
RU10800

RRU for
WCDMA/LTE
2100 MHz
(2x40 W)

RRU3808 working at
2100 MHz:
l UL: 1920 MHz to
1980 MHz; DL: 2110
MHz to 2170 MHz
l It can work in UMTS
or LTE mode.

The number of packages to


be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For detailed specifications,
see Technical
Specifications of RRUs.

4.3.7 RF Modules Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz)


This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 7 (2600 MHz
frequency band).

RFUs Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz Frequency Band)


The following table lists RFU configurations.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-31 RFU configurations


Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

l WD5M26LRFU0C
(applying to the
BTS3900,
BTS3900A, and
BTS3900L)

RFU for
LTE
2600M C
(2x40W)

LRFU working at
segment C of the 2600
MHz frequency band:

BTS3900
cabinet,
BTS3900A,
or
BTS3900L
cabinet: 12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power. For
details about the specifications,
see Technical Specifications of
RFUs.

l WD5P26LRFU0C
(applying to the
BTS3900AL)

l The module has


two transmit
channels and its
maximum output
power is 2x40 W.
l UL: 2500 MHz to
2520 MHz; DL:
2620 MHz to 2640
MHz

At a
BTS3900A
L site: 18

l It can work in LTE


mode.
l WD5M26LRFU0E
(applying to the
BTS3900,
BTS3900A, and
BTS3900L)
l WD5P26LRFU0E
(applying to the
BTS3900AL)

RFU for
LTE
2600M E
(2x40W)

LRFU working at
segment E of the 2600
MHz frequency band:
l The module has
two transmit
channels and its
maximum output
power is 2x40 W.
l UL: 2550 MHz to
2570 MHz; DL:
2670 MHz to 2690
MHz
l It can work in LTE
mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Descripti
on

Function

l WD5M26LRFU00
(applying to the
BTS3900,
BTS3900A, and
BTS3900L)

RFU for
LTE
2600M D
(2x40W)

LRFU working at
segment D of the 2600
MHz frequency band:

l WD5P26LRFU00
(applying to the
BTS3900AL)

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

l The module has


two transmit
channels and its
maximum output
power is 2x40 W.
l UL: 2510 MHz to
2560 MHz; DL:
2630 MHz to 2680
MHz
l It can work in LTE
mode.

RRUs Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz Frequency Band)


The following table lists RRU configurations.
Table 4-32 RRU configurations
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD5M26
324000

RRU3240
for LTE
2600MHz
(2x40W,
2T4R)

RRU3240 working at the


2600 MHz frequency
band:

At a DBS3900 site:
12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.

l The module has two


transmit channels and
four receive channels
and its maximum
output power is 2x40
W.

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site: 6
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570


MHz; DL: 2620 MHz
to 2690 MHz
l It can work in LTE
mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD5M26
LRRU0C

RRU for
LTE 2600M
C (2x40W)

RRU3201 working at
segment C of the 2600
MHz frequency band:

At a DBS3900 site:
12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.

l UL: 2500 MHz to 2520


MHz; DL: 2620 MHz
to 2640 MHz
l It can work in LTE
mode.

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets: 6

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.D cabinets: 9
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9
WD5M26
LRRU0D

RRU for
LTE 2600M
D (2x40W)

RRU3201 working at
segment D of the 2600
MHz frequency band:
l UL: 2510 MHz to 2560
MHz; DL: 2630 MHz
to 2680 MHz
l It can work in LTE
mode.

At a DBS3900 site:
12
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets: 6

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For detailed specifications, see
Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.D cabinets: 9
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD5M26
LRRU0E

RRU for
LTE 2600M
E (2x40W)

RRU3201 working at
segment E of the 2600
MHz frequency band:

At a DBS3900 site:
12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.

l UL: 2550 MHz to 2570


MHz; DL: 2670 MHz
to 2690 MHz
l It can work in LTE
mode.

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets: 6

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.D cabinets: 9
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9
WD5M26
LRRU68

RRU for
LTE
2600MHz
(2x40W)

RRU3268, blade RRU


working at the 2600 MHz
frequency band:
l Its maximum output
power is 2x40 W.
l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570
MHz; DL: 2620 MHz
to 2690 MHz
l It can work in LTE
mode.

At a DBS3900 site:
12
At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets: 6

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
For detailed specifications, see
Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.D cabinets: 9
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD5M26
326000

RRU for
LTE
2600MHz
(2x40W,
2T4R)

RRU3260, blade RRU


working at the 2600 MHz
frequency band:

At a DBS3900 site:
12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.

l The module has two


transmit channels and
four receive channels
and its maximum
output power is 2x40
W.
l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570
MHz; DL: 2620 MHz
to 2690 MHz
l It can work in LTE
mode.

WD5M26
326200

RRU for
LTE
2600MHz
(2x60W,
2T4R)

RRU3262 working at the


2600 MHz frequency
band:
l The module has two
transmit channels and
four receive channels
and its maximum
output power is 2x60
W.

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets: 6

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site
configured with
Ver.D cabinets: 9
At a BTS3900AL
site: 9
At a DBS3900 site:
l 18 (when the
BBU is
installed in a
rack)

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of
RRUs.

l 12 (when the
BBU is
installed in the
APM30H)

l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570


MHz; DL: 2620 MHz
to 2690 MHz
l It can work in LTE
mode.

4.3.8 RF Modules Working at Band 4 (AWS)


This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 4 (AWS).

RFUs Working at Band 4 (AWS)


The following table lists the RFU configuration.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-33 RFU configuration


External Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximu
m
Quantity

Configuration Principle

l QCYMAWSRFU01
(applicable to BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L)

CRFUd for
LTE AWS
(2x60 W)

RF module working at
the AWS band:
l The module has
two transmit
channels and its
maximum output
power is 2x60 W.

BTS3900
cabinet,
BTS3900
A, or
BTS3900
L cabinet:
12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
of carriers, and output power.
For details about the
specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RFUs.

l UL: 1710 MHz to


1755 MHz; DL:
2110 MHz to 2155
MHz

BTS3900
AL
cabinet:
18

l QCYPAWSRFU01
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

l It can work in LTE


mode.

RRUs Working at Band 4 (AWS)


The following table lists the RRU configuration.
Table 4-34 RRU configuration
External
Model

Description

Function

Maximum Quantity

Configuration
Principle

WD5MA
W384100

RRU for LTE


AWS (4T4R,
2x60 W/4x30
W)

RRU3841 working at the


AWS band:

At a DBS3900 site: 12

The number of packages


to be configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.

l It works in 4T4R mode


and provides
maximum output
power of 2x60 W or
4x30 W.

At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L
site: 6
At a BTS3900AL site: 9

l UL: 1710 MHz to


1755 MHz; DL: 2110
MHz to 2155 MHz

For detailed
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RRUs.

l It can work in LTE


mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Description

Function

Maximum Quantity

Configuration
Principle

QWEMRR
U40200

RRU for
WCDMA
AWS (60 W)

RRU3804 working at the


AWS band:

At a DBS3900 site: 12

l UL: 1710 MHz to


1755 MHz; DL: 2110
MHz to 2155 MHz

At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.B) or
(Ver.C) cabinets: 6

The number of packages


to be configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.

l It supports a maximum
of four carriers. The
maximum output
power is 60 W.
l It can work in UMTS
mode.
QWEMRR
U40800

RRU for
WCDMA/LTE
AWS (2x40 W)

At a BTS3900C site: 1

At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
cabinets: 9
At a BTS3900AL site: 9

RRU3808 working at the


AWS band:

At a DBS3900 site: 12

l UL: 1710 MHz to


1755 MHz; DL: 2110
MHz to 2155 MHz

At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.B) or
(Ver.C) cabinets: 6

l It can work in UMTS,


LTE, or UL SDR
mode.

For detailed
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RRUs.

At a BTS3900C site: 1

At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
cabinets: 9

The number of packages


to be configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.
For detailed
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RRUs.

At a BTS3900AL site: 9
WD5M213
83200

RRU3832 for
AWS (2x60 W)

RRU3832, blade RRU


working at the AWS band
l The module has two
transmit channels and
four receive channels
and its maximum
output power is 2x60
W.
l UL: 1710 MHz to
1755 MHz; DL: 2110
MHz to 2155 MHz

At a DBS3900 site: 12
At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.B) or
(Ver.C) cabinets: 6
At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
cabinets: 9
At a BTS3900AL site: 9

The number of packages


to be configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power.
For detailed
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RRUs.

l It can work in UMTS,


LTE, or UL SDR
mode.

4.3.9 RF Modules Working at Band 12 (700 MHz)


This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules supporting band 12 (700 MHz).
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

RRUs Supporting Band 12 (700 MHz)


The following table lists the RRU configuration.
Table 4-35 RRU configuration
External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum Quantity

Configuration
Principle

WD5M07L
RRU00

RRU for LTE


700 MHz
(2x40 W)

RRU3203 supporting band


12 (700 MHz):

In a DBS3900: 12

The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers,
and output power.

l The module has two


transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x40 W.

In a BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L: 6
In a BTS3900AL: 9

l UL: 698 MHz to 716


MHz; DL: 728 MHz to
746 MHz

For detailed
specifications, see
Technical
Specifications of
RRUs.

l It can work in LTE


mode.

4.3.10 RF Modules Working at Band 13 (700 MHz)


This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules supporting band 13 (700 MHz).

RRUs Supporting Band 13 (700 MHz)


The following table lists the RRU configuration.
Table 4-36 RRU configuration
External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD5M07L
RRU01

RRU for
LTE 700
MHz (2x40
W)

RRU3201 supporting band


13 (700 MHz):

In a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L: 6

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
of carriers, and output power.

l The module has two


transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x40 W.

In a BTS3900AL: 9

l UL: 776 MHz to 787


MHz; DL: 746 MHz to
757 MHz

For detailed specifications,


see Technical Specifications
of RRUs.

l It can work in LTE


mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD5M0732
6900

RRU for
LTE
700MHz
(2x60W)

RRU3269 working at band


12 and band 13(700 MHz
frequency band):

DBS3900: 12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number
of carriers, and output power.

l The module has two


transmit channels and
its maximum output
power is 2x60 W.

BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L: 6
BTS3900AL: 9

For detailed specifications,


see Technical Specifications
of RRUs.

l Band13, UL: 776MHz


to 787MHz; DL:
746MHz to 757MHz
l Band12, UL: 699MHz
to 716MHz; DL:
729MHz to 746MHz
l It can work in LTE
mode.

4.3.11 RF Modules Working at Band 20 (800 MHz)


This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 800 MHz.

RFUs Working at Band 20 (800 MHz)


The following table lists the RFU configuration.
Table 4-37 RFU configuration
External Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

l WD5M08LRFU0E
(applicable to
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L)

LRFU for
LTE 800
MHz (2x60
W)

LRFUe working at
800 MHz:

BTS3900
cabinet,
BTS3900A, or
BTS3900L
cabinet: 12

The number of packages to


be configured is determined
by the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and
output power. For details
about the specifications, see
Technical Specifications of
RFUs.

l WD5P08LRFU0E
(applicable to
BTS3900AL)

l The module has


two transmit
channels and its
maximum output
power is 2x60 W.

BTS3900AL
cabinet: 18

l UL: 832 MHz to


862 MHz; DL:
791 MHz to 821
MHz
l It can work in
LTE mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

RRUs Working at Band 20 (800 MHz)


The following table lists the RRU configuration.
Table 4-38 RRU configuration
External
Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD5MD8L
RRU0A

RRU for
LTE 800
MHz A
(2x40 W)

RRU3220 working at
segment A of the 800 MHz
band:

At a DBS3900
site: 12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.

l UL: 832 MHz to 847


MHz; DL: 791 MHz to
806 MHz
l It can work in LTE
mode.

WD5MD8L
RRU0B

WD5MD8L
RRU00

RRU for
LTE 800
MHz B
(2x40 W)

RRU for
LTE 800
MHz
(2x40 W)

RRU3220 working at
segment B of the 800 MHz
band:

At a BTS3900C
site: 1
At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.B) or
(Ver.C)
cabinets: 6

l It can work in LTE


mode.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.D)
cabinets: 9

RRU3222 working at the


800 MHz frequency band:

At a
BTS3900AL
site: 9

l UL: 842 MHz to 862


MHz; DL: 801 MHz to
821 MHz

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of RRUs.

l UL: 832 MHz to 862


MHz; DL: 791 MHz to
821 MHz
l It can work in LTE
mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Descripti
on

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD5M08LR
RU68

RRU for
LTE 800
MHz
(2x40 W)

RRU3268, blade RRU


working at the 800 MHz
full band:

At a DBS3900
site: 12

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.

l The maximum output


power is 2x40 W.
l UL: 832 MHz to 847
MHz; DL: 791 MHz to
806 MHz
It can work in LTE mode.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.B) or
(Ver.C)
cabinets: 6

For detailed specifications, see


Technical Specifications of RRUs.

At a site using
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
(Ver.D)
cabinets: 9
At a
BTS3900AL
site: 9

4.3.12 RF Modules Working at Band 28 (700 MHz)


This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 28 (700 MHz).

Configuration of RRUs Working at Band 28 (APT700)


The following table lists RRU configurations.
Table 4-39 RRU configurations
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

WD5M07LR
RU02

RRU for
LTE
APT700
(2T2R, 2x40
W)

RRU3268 working at the APT700


band:

At a DBS3900
site: 12

It works in 2T2R mode and


provides the maximum output
power of 2x40 W.

At a
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
site: 6

The number of packages


to be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output
power.

l UL: 703 MHz to 743 MHz


DL: 758 MHz to 798 MHz
l It can work in LTE mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

At a
BTS3900AL
site: 9

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

For detailed
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RRUs.

110

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

WD5M07LR
RU03

RRU for
LTE
APT700
(2T2R, 2x40
W)

RRU3268 working at the APT700


band:

At a DBS3900
site: 12

It works in 2T2R mode and


provides the maximum output
power of 2x40 W.

At a
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900L
site: 6

The number of packages


to be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output
power.

l UL: 718 MHz to 748 MHz


DL: 773 MHz to 803 MHz
l It can work in LTE mode.

At a
BTS3900AL
site: 9

For detailed
specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RRUs.

RFUs Working at Band 28 (APT700)


The following table lists RFU configurations.
Table 4-40 RFU configurations
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

l WD5M07
LRFU01
(applying
to the
BTS3900,
BTS3900
A, and
BTS3900L
)

RFU for
LTE
APT700
(2x80W)

LRFUe working at the lower 40


MHz segment of band 28
(APT700M):

BTS3900
cabinet,
BTS3900A, or
BTS3900L
cabinet: 12

The number of packages


to be configured is
determined by the number
of sectors, number of
carriers, and output
power. For details about
the specifications, see
Technical Specifications
of RFUs.

l WD5P07L
RFU01
(applying
to the
BTS3900
AL)

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

l The module has two transmit


channels and its maximum
output power is 2x80 W.
l UL: 703 MHz to 743 MHz
l DL: 758 MHz to 798 MHz

At a
BTS3900AL
site: 18

l It can work in LTE mode.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

Model

Descriptio
n

Function

l WD5M07
LRFU02
(applying
to the
BTS3900,
BTS3900
A, and
BTS3900L
)

RFU for
LTE
APT700
(2x80W)

LRFUe working at the higher


30MHz segment of Band 28
(APT700M):

4 Product Configuration

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration
Principle

l The module has two transmit


channels and its maximum
output power is 2x40 W.
l UL: 718 MHz to 748 MHz
l DL: 773 MHz to 803 MHz
l It can work in LTE mode.

l WD5P07L
RFU02
(applying
to the
BTS3900
AL)

4.4 AAU Configuration


This section describes the AAU configuration principles.

4.4.1 AAU3910 Configurations


This section describes the AAU3910 configuration principles.

RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)


The following table lists the principles for configuring RF modules working at Band 2 (1800
MHz).

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-41 Principles for configuring RF modules working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)
Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration
Principle

WD7M18M
AAU00

AAU3910 1800
MHz (2T2R, 2x63
dBm), 1710 to
1880 MHz (UP),
1920 to 2170
MHZ/2500 to
2690 MHz
(DOWN)

1.8 A (2T2R)+2.1/2.6 P:

Each sector is configured


with one AAU.

l An RU3938 is used, which is in


2T2R mode and provides the
maximum output power of 2x40
W.

For carrier power


specifications of the
RU3938, see technical
specifications of the
RRU3938.

l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL:


1805 MHz to 1880 MHz
l It can work in LTE mode.
l It can provide a 4-port broadband
antenna of 2100 MHz/2600 MHz
for external RRUs and RFUs.

RF Modules Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz)


The following table lists the principles for configuring RF modules working at Band 1 (2100
MHz).
Table 4-42 Principles for configuring RF modules working at Band 1 (2100 MHz)
Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration
Principle

WD7M21W
AAU00

AAU3910 2100 MHz


(2T4R, 2x65 dBm),
1920 to 2170 MHz
(UP), 1710 to 1880
MHz/2500 to 2690
MHZ (DOWN)

2.1 A (2T4R)+1.8/2.6 P:

Each sector is
configured with one
AAU.

l An RU3832 is used, which is in


2T4R mode and provides the
maximum output power of 2x60
W.
l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz;
DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
l It can work in UMTS mode.

For carrier power


specifications of the
RU3832, see
technical
specifications of the
RRU3832.

l It can provide a 4-port broadband


antenna of 1800 MHz/2600 MHz
for external RRUs and RFUs.

RF Modules Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz)


The following table lists the principles for configuring RF modules working at Band 7 (2600
MHz).
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-43 Principles for configuring RF modules working at Band 1 (2600 MHz)
Model

Description

Function

Maximu
m
Quantit
y

Configuration
Principle

WD7M26LA
AU00

AAU3910 2600
MHz (2T4R, 2x63
dBm), 2500 to
2690 MHz (UP),
1710 to 2170 MHz
(DOWN)

2.6 A (2T4R)+PCS/1.8/2.1/AWS P:

Each sector is
configured with one
AAU.

l An RU3260 is used, which is in


2T4R mode and provides the
maximum output power of 2x40 W.

For carrier power


specifications of the
RU3260, see
technical
specifications of the
RRU3260.

l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL:


2620 MHz to 2690 MHz
l It can work in LTE mode.
l It can provide a 4-port broadband
antenna of PCS/1800 MHz/2100
MHz/AWS for external RRUs and
RFUs.

WD7M26LA
AU01

AAU3910 2600
MHz (2T2R, 2x63
dBm), 2500 to
2690 MHz (UP),
1710 to 2170 MHz
(DOWN)

2.6 A (2T2R)+PCS/1.8/2.1/AWS P:
l An RU3268 is used, which is in
2T2R mode and provides the
maximum output power of 2x40 W.
l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL:
2620 MHz to 2690 MHz
l It can work in LTE mode.
l It can provide a 4-port broadband
antenna of PCS/1800 MHz/2100
MHz/AWS for external RRUs and
RFUs.

Each sector is
configured with one
AAU.
For carrier power
specifications of the
RU3268, see
technical
specifications of the
RRU3268.

RF Modules Working at Band 4 (AWS)


The following table lists the principles for configuring RF modules working at Band 4 (AWS).

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-44 Principles for configuring RF modules working at Band 4 (AWS)


Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration
Principle

WD7MAW
SAAU00

AAU3910 AWS
(2T4R, 2x65 dBm),
1710 to 1770 MHz/
2110 to 2170 MHz
(UP), 1850 to 1990
MHz (DOWN)

AWS A (2T4R)+PCS P:

Each sector is
configured with one
AAU.

l An RU3832 is used, which is in


2T4R mode and provides the
maximum output power of 2x60
W.

For carrier power


specifications of the
RU3832, see technical
specifications of the
RRU3832.

l UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL:


2110 MHz to 2155 MHz
l It can work in UMTS, LTE, or UL
mode.
l It can provide a 4-port antenna of
PCS for external RRUs or RFUs.

RF Modules Working at Mixed Frequency Bands


RUs working in 1800 MHz, 2100 MHz, and 2600 MHz frequency bands can form 2 A
configurations (high-frequency module in the upper slot and low-frequency module in the lower
slot), as listed in the following table.
Table 4-45 Principles for configuring RF modules working in mixed frequency bands
Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quanti
ty

Configuration
Principle

WD7MWMJ
AAU00

AAU3910 2100
MHz+1800
MHz (2T4R,
2x65 dBm,
2T2R,
2x63dBm),
1920 to 2170
MHz (UP),
1710 to 1880
MHz/2500 to
2690 MHz
(DOWN)

2.1 A (2T4R)+1.8 A (2T2R)

Each sector is
configured with one
AAU.

An RU3938 is used as a 1.8 A RF module:


l It works in 2T2R mode and provides
the maximum output power of 2x40 W.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz; DL:
1710 MHz to 1880 MHz
l It can work in LTE mode.
An RU3832 is used as a 2.1 A RF module:
l It works in 2T4R mode and provides
the maximum output power of 2x60 W.

For carrier power


specifications of the
RU3938 and RU3832,
see technical
specifications of the
RRU3938 and
RRU3832,
respectively.

l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL:


2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
l It can work in UMTS mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quanti
ty

Configuration
Principle

WD7MWLJ
AAU00

AAU3910 2600
MHz+2100
MHz (2T4R,
2x63 dBm,
2T4R, 2x65
dBm), 2500 to
2690 MHz
(UP), 1710 to
2170 MHz
(DOWN)

2.6 A (2T4R) + 2.1 A (2T4R)

Each sector is
configured with one
AAU.

An RU3832 is used as a 2.1 A RF module:


l It works in 2T4R mode and provides
the maximum output power of 2x60 W.

For carrier power


specifications of the
RU3832 and RU3260,
see technical
specifications of the
RRU3832 and
RRU3260.

l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL:


2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
l It can work in UMTS mode.
An RU3260 is used as the 2.6 A RF
module.
l It works in 2T4R mode and provides
the maximum output power of 2x40 W.
l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL:
2620 MHz to 2690 MHz
l It can work in LTE mode.

WD7MLMJ
AAU00

AAU3910 2600
MHz+1800
MHz (2T4R,
2x63 dBm,
2T4R, 2x63
dBm), 2500 to
2690 MHz
(UP), 1710 to
2170 MHz
(DOWN)

2.6 A (2T4R) + 1.8 A (2T2R)


An RU3938 is used as a 1.8 A RF module:
l It works in 2T2R mode and provides
the maximum output power of 2x40 W.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz; DL:
1710 MHz to 1880 MHz
l It can work in LTE mode.
An RU3260 is used as the 2.6 A RF
module.
l It works in 2T4R mode and provides
the maximum output power of 2x40 W.

Each sector is
configured with one
AAU.
For carrier power
specifications of the
RU3938 and RU3260,
see technical
specifications of the
RRU3938 and
RRU3260,
respectively.

l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL:


2620 MHz to 2690 MHz
l It can work in LTE mode.

4.4.2 AAU3902 Configurations


This section describes configuration principles, typical configurations, and typical conversions
of an AAU3902.

AAU3902 Configuration Principles


The AAU3902 configuration principles are as follows:

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Each sector needs to be configured with an AAU3902. The number of RF modules is


determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.

The AAU3902 is an antenna with horizontal beamwidth of 65, and therefore does not
apply to an omni-directional site.

In sector splitting scenarios, the 4RXD mode (1T4R/2T4R/4T4R) is not supported.


Therefore, the configuration of six sectors is not supported.

For RU44-2.1G
If a sector is not split, an AAU3902 supports one sector with a horizontal beamwidth
of 65 degrees, and an RU44-2.1G supports a maximum of eight 1T2R carriers or four
2T2R/2T4R carriers (if 4R is required).
If a sector is split vertically, an AAU3902 supports two sectors, each with a horizontal
beamwidth of 65 degrees, and an RU44-2.1G supports a maximum of four 1T2R carriers
or four 2T2R carriers. It does not support 1T4R and 2T4R carriers.
The WBBPf1-4 is recommended. In 4RX mode, the WBBPb and WBBPd only support
small specifications, and they do not support CPRI MUX. Therefore, the WBBPf is
recommended in 4RX mode.

For RU44-1.8 G
The LTE mode supports the AAS vertical sector splitting and vertical four receive
features.
The GSM mode does not support the AAS vertical sector splitting and vertical four
receive features.
It is recommended that the UBBP be used to support multiple modes because the 1800
MHz RU44 does not have a baseband processing unit.
The AAU3902 can be used in eGBTS sites rather than GBTS sites. Therefore, the UMPT
must be configured.

An AAU3902 with one active unit can be transited to support two active units. For example,
an 1800 MHz RU44 can be added to an AAU3902 with the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P
+(1710 to 2690) P configuration to support the 2100 A+1800 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710
to 2690) P configuration,
or a 2600 MHz RU44 can be added to convert the AAU3902 so that the AAU3902
supports the 2100 A+2600 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration.

Typical configuration of an AAU3902


The following table lists the typical configurations of an AAU3902.
Table 4-46 Typical configurations of an AAU3902
Typical Configurations

MU02

RU44-2.1
G

RU44-1.8
G

PU22

CU01

Supporting
Version

2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to


2690) P

SRAN8.0

2100 A+ 1800 A+ (790 to 960) P+


(1710 to 2690) P

SRAN9.0

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Typical Configurations

MU02

RU44-2.1
G

RU44-1.8
G

PU22

CU01

Supporting
Version

1800 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to


2690) P

SRAN9.0

The typical configuration of an AAU3902 is 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P. Its
package contains an RU44 of 2100 MHz. It can connect to a high-frequency RRU/RFU and a
low-frequency RRU/RFU. The following table shows the configuration.
Table 4-47 Principles for configuring an AAU3902
External Model

Description

Function

Configuration Principle

WD7MR44M0200

2100 A+(790 to 960) P


+(1710 to 2690) P

AAU3902 RU44-2100
MHz (2x63 dBm), 790
MHz to 960 MHz, 1710
MHz to 2690 MHz

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
A package consists of an
AU02V, an RU44-2.1G, an
MU02, a PU22, and a CU.

WD7MR44M0218

1800 A+(790 to 960) P


+(1710 to 2690) P

AAU3902 RU44-1800
MHz (2x63 dBm), 790 to
960 MHz, 1710 to 2690
MHz

The number of packages to be


configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.
A package consists of an
AU02V, an RU44-1.8G, an
MU02, a PU22, and a CU.

The typical configuration of an SRAN9.0 AAU3902 is 1800 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690)
P. Its package contains an RU44 of 1800 MHz. It can connect to a high-frequency RRU/RFU
and a low-frequency RRU/RFU, as shown in the following figure.

Typical AAU3902 Conversion


An AAU3902 with one active unit can be converted to support two active units. For example,
an 1800 MHz RU44 can be added to an AAU3902 with the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to
2690) P configuration to convert the AAU3902 so that the AAU3902 supports the 2100 A+1800
A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration, or a 2600 MHz RU44can be added to convert
the AAU3902 so that the AAU3902 supports the 2100 A+2600 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to
2690) P configuration. The following figure shows the conversion.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Figure 4-17 AAU3902 conversion

4.4.3 AAU3920 Configurations


This section describes configuration principles and typical configurations of the AAU3920.

Principles for Configuring an AAU3920


The AAU3920 configuration principles are as follows:
l

The baseband processing boards can be configured for UMTS are WBBPb1 to WBBPb4,
WBBPd1 to WBBPd3, and WBBPf1 to WBBPf4. In 4RX mode, the WBBPb and WBBPd
only support small specifications, and they do not support CPRI MUX. Therefore, the
WBBPf is recommended in 4RX mode.

A UBBPd can be configured as a baseband processing board in LTE mode to support UL


mode.

The AAU3920 supports a -48 V DC power supply socket and does not support power
cascading.

The passive antennas of the AAU3920 can be used on devices provided by Huawei or
customers.

The AAU3920's CPRI configuration principles are as follows:


l

The active RU configured on the AAU3920 provides two CPRI ports to connect to BBUs.
Each CPRI port supports a rate of 9.8 Gbit/s. For LO/UL base stations in wideband 2x2T4R
mode, the 2:1 Compression and CPRI MUX features need to be supported.

Multiple AAU3920s cannot be cascaded because of bandwidth limitation. In small


bandwidth configuration scenarios, three sectors supported by one base station can be
cascaded. In this case, a maximum of three cascading levels are supported. During the
cascading, you need to consider the number of cells supported by CPRI bandwidth and
CPRI port adaptive capabilities.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

It is not recommended that active and passive modules be cascaded by connecting CPRI
ports.

The AAU3920 is configured with 9.8 Gbit/s optical modules by default.

The AAU3920 electrical tilt configuration principles are as follows:


l

Different modes in same frequency band must use the same downtilt.

The electrical tilt is adjusted independently on 2T working at 1.8 GHz and 2.1 GHz.

The downtilt of the 2.6 GHz 2T cannot be independently adjusted in RET mode. 2.6 GHz
2T must use the same downtilt with 1.8 GHz 2T. For 2.6 GHz 4T, one 2.6 GHz 2T must
use the same downtilt with 1.8 GHz 2T, and other 2.6 GHz 2T must use the same downtilt
with 2.1 GHz 2T.

Determine the principles for sharing the same downtilt and independent electrical tilt
according to the network planning and optimization requirements.

Typical Configuration of an AAU3920


The following table shows the carrier configuration of the AAU3920.
Table 4-48 Carrier configuration of the AAU3920
Description

Function

Working
Mode

Configuration Capacity

1.8 GHz (GSM


+LTE)+2.1 GHz
(LTE+UMTS)

1.8 GHz (UL: 1710~1785


MHz, DL: 1805~1880 MHz)
+2.1 GHz (UL: 1920~1980
MHz, DL: 2110~2170 MHz)

Single band
mode (1.8
GHz)

GSM 8C 1T2R+LTE 1C 2x20 MHz 2T4R


or 2T2R

Single band
mode (2.1
GHz)

UMTS 4C 2T4R or 2T2R

Dual band
mode (1.8 GHz
+2.1 GHz)

1.8 GHz LTE 2C+2.1 GHz UMTS 4C


(without MIMO)

GSM 4C 1T2R+LTE 2C 2x20 MHz 2T4R


or 2T2R

UMTS 8C 1T2R or 1T4R

1.8 GHz LTE 2C+2.1 GHz UMTS 2C


(without MIMO)
1.8 GHz GSM 6C+LTE 1C+2.1 GHz
UMTS 2C (without MIMO)
1.8 GHz GSM 6C+LTE 1C+2.1 GHz
UMTS 1C (MIMO)
1.8 GHz GSM 4C+LTE 1C+2.1 GHz
UMTS 4C (without MIMO)
1.8 GHz GSM 4C+LTE 1C+2.1 GHz
UMTS 3C (MIMO)
1.8 GHz GSM 3C+LTE 1C+2.1 GHz
UMTS 3C (without MIMO)

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

The following table lists AAU3920 configuration.


Table 4-49 AAU3920 configuration
Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration
Principle

WD7MAA
U39200

Functional
moduleAAU3920WD7MJRTAGX0
A-RUa3920-1800
MHz+2100 MHz
(2*67 dBm),2500
MHz-2690 MHz

1.8 GHz+2.1 GHz (2T4R):

Each sector is configured


with one AAU.

l The wideband 2T4R module is


used and its maximum output
power is 2x80 W.
l TX: 1805-1880 MHz, RX:
1710-1785 MHz/TX: 2110-2170
MHz, RX: 1920-1980 MHz

For carrier power


specifications of the
AAU3920, see technical
specifications of the
AAU3920.

l It can work in UMTS or LTE


mode.

4.4.4 AAU3911 Configurations


Configurations of RF Module 1A Working at Band 3 (1800 MHz)
The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at band 3 (1800 MHz).

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-50 RF Modules Working at Band 3 (1800 MHz)


Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration
Principle

WD7METBN
2000

AAU3911,1800
MHz 2T4R',
2*60W(UP) +
1.8G/2.1G
Combiner 4path
(DOWN);

1.8 GHz A 2T4R' 2x60


W (RU3952m)+2.1
GHz P (4-port)+2.6 GHz
P (4-port) 700~900 P (2port):

The RU3952m is
configured to
work at a single
frequency band
(1.8 GHz) in
2T4R mode. It
uses four DIN
connectors (A/B/
C/D). Its
configuration
scheme is the
same as the 2T4R
module. The 2.1
GHz 2R channel
of the RU3952m
is not functional.

Antenna
1710~2170MHz
(UP),
2500~26900M
Hz/
690~960MHz
(DOWN)

l The RU3952m is
used to support interfrequency mutual
aid. Its maximum
output power is 2x60
W and it works at
1800 MHz (UL:
1710 MHz to 1785
MHz; DL: 1805
MHz to 1880 MHz)
in 2T4R mode.
l It can work in GSM,
LTE, or GL mode.
l It can provide the
following wideband
antennas for external
RRUs or RFUs: 4port 2.1 GHz antenna
(the ports are
provided by the
1.8/2.1 GHz external
combiner in the
lower slot), 4-port
2.6 GHz antenna (the
ports are on the
bottom of the
antenna), and 2-port
700 MHz/900 MHz
antenna (the ports are
on the bottom of the
antenna).

For carrier power


specifications of
the RU3952m,
see technical
specifications of
the RRU3952m.

Configurations of RF Module 1A Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz)


The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at band 1 (2100 MHz).

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-51 Principles for configuring RF modules working at band 1 (2100 MHz)
Model

Description

Function

Maxi
mum
Quan
tity

Configuration
Principle

WD7MI
TBO200
0

AAU3911,210
0MHz 2T4R',
2*60W(UP) +
1.8G/2.1G
Combiner
4path
(DOWN);

2.1 GHz A 2T4R' 2x60 W


(RU3832m)+1.8 GHz P (4port)+2.6 GHz P (4-port)
700~900 P (2-port):

The RU3952m is
configured to work
at a single
frequency band (2.1
GHz) in 2T4R
mode. It uses four
DIN connectors (A/
B/C/D). Its
configuration
scheme is the same
as the 2T4R
module. The 1.8
GHz 2R channel of
the RU3952m is not
functional.

Antenna
1710~2170M
Hz(UP),
2500~26900
MHz/
690~960MHz
(DOWN)

l The RU3952m is used to


support inter-frequency
mutual aid. Its maximum
output power is 2x60 W
and it works at 2100 MHz
(UL: 1920 MHz to 1980
MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to
2170 MHz) in 2T4R mode.
l It can work in UMTS
mode.
l It can provide the
following wideband
antennas for external
RRUs or RFUs: 4-port 1.8
GHz antenna (the ports are
provided by the 1.8/2.1
GHz external combiner in
the lower slot), 4-port 2.6
GHz antenna (the ports are
on the bottom of the
antenna), and 2-port
700-900 MHz antenna (the
ports are on the bottom of
the antenna).

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

For carrier power


specifications of
the RU3952m, see
technical
specifications of
the RRU3952m.

123

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maxi
mum
Quan
tity

Configuration
Principle

WD7MA
AU39113

AAU3911,
2100 MHz
2T4R,2*60 W
(UP)
+1920~2170
MHz/
1710~1880
MHz
Combiner 4
path
(DOWN);
Antenna
1710~2690
MHz (UP),
690~960 MHz
(DOWN)

2.1 G A 2T4R 2x60 W


(RU3832)+1.8 P (four ports)
+700~900 P (two ports):

Each sector is
configured with
one AAU.

l An RU3832 is used, which


works in 2T4R mode and
provides the maximum
output power of 2x60 W.
l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980
MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to
2170 MHz

For carrier power


specifications of
the RU3832, see
technical
specifications of
the RRU3832.

l It can work in UMTS


mode.
l It can provide a 4-port
broadband antenna of 1800
MHz and a 2-port
broadband antenna of 700
MHz or 900 MHz for
external RRUs and RFUs.

Configurations of RF Module 1A Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz)


The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at band 7 (2600 MHz).

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-52 Principles for configuring RF modules working at band 7 (2600 MHz)
Model

Description

Function

Maxi
mum
Quan
tity

Configuration
Principle

WD7MA
AU39111

AAU3911,
2600 MHz
2T4R, 2*40 W
(UP); Antenna
2500~2690
MHz (UP),
1710~2170
MHz/690~960
MHz
(DOWN)

2.6 A 2T4R 2x40 W (RU3260)


+1.8~2.1 P (four ports)
+700~900 P (two ports)

Each sector is
configured with
one AAU.

l An RU3260 is used, which


works in 2T4R mode and
provides the maximum
output power of 2x40 W.
l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570
MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to
2690 MHz

For carrier power


specifications of
the RU3260, see
technical
specifications of
the RRU3260.

l It can work in LTE mode.


l It can provide a 4-port
antenna of 1800-2100
MHz and a 2-port
wideband antenna of
700/900 MHz for external
RRUs or RFUs.

Configurations of RF Module 1A Working at Band 4 (AWS)


The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at band 4 (AWS).

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-53 Principles for configuring RF modules working at band 4 (AWS)


Model

Description

Function

Maxi
mum
Quan
tity

Configuration
Principle

WD7MA
AU39110

AAU3911,
AWS 2T4R,
2*60 W (UP)
+AWS/PCS
Combiner 4
path
(DOWN);
Antenna
1710~2690
MHz (UP),
690~960 MHz
(DOWN)

AWS A 2T4R 2x60 W


(RU3832)+PCS P (4-port)
+700~900 P (2-port):

Each sector is
configured with
one AAU.

l An RU3832 is used, which


works in 2T4R mode and
provides the maximum
output power of 2x60 W.

For carrier power


specifications of
the RU3832, see
technical
specifications of
the RRU3832.

l UL: 1710 MHz to 1755


MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to
2155 MHz
l It can work in UMTS, LTE,
or UL mode.
l It can provide a 4-port
antenna of PCS and a 2port broadband antenna of
700 MHz or 900 MHz for
external RRUs and RFUs.

WD7MA
AU39114

AAU3911,
AWS 2T4R,
2x60 W
(DOWN);
Antenna
2500~2690
MHz (UP),
1710~2170
MHz/690~960
MHz
(DOWN)

AWS A 2T4R 2x60 W


(RU3832)+700~900 P (2port):
l An RU3832 is used, which
works in 2T4R mode and
provides the maximum
output power of 2x60 W.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1755
MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to
2155 MHz

Each sector is
configured with
one AAU.
For carrier power
specifications of
the RU3832, see
technical
specifications of
the RRU3832.

l It can work in UMTS, LTE,


or UL mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Configurations of RF Module 2A
Table 4-54 Configurations of RF module 2A
Model

Description

Function

Maxi
mum
Quan
tity

Configuration
Principle

WD7MA
AU39112

AAU3911,
2600 MHz
2T4R, 2x40 W
(UP) + AWS
2T4R, 2x60 W
(DOWN);
Antenna
2500~2690
MHz (UP),
1710~2170
MHz/
690~960 MHz
(DOWN)

2.6 A 2T4R 2x40 W (RU3260)


+AWS A 2T4R 2x60 W
(RU3832)+700~900 P (2port):

Each sector is
configured with
one AAU.

An RU3260 is used as a 2.6 A


RF module:
l An RU3260 is used, which
works in 2T4R mode and
provides the maximum
output power of 2x40 W.
l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570
MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to
2690 MHz
l It can work in LTE mode.
An RU3832 is used as an
AWS A RF module:

For carrier power


specifications of
the RU3260, see
technical
specifications of
the RRU3260.
For carrier power
specifications of
the RU3832, see
technical
specifications of
the RRU3832.

l An RU3832 is used, which


works in 2T4R mode and
provides the maximum
output power of 2x60 W.
UL: 1710 MHz to 1755
MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to
2155 MHz
l It can work in UMTS, LTE,
or UL mode.
l It can provide a 2-port
broadband antenna of 700
MHz/900 MHz for external
RRUs and RFUs.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maxi
mum
Quan
tity

Configuration
Principle

WD7MJT
BK3000

AU3911, 2.1
GHz 2T4R',
2x60 W (UP)
+1.8 GHz
2T4R', 2x60
W (DOWN);
Antenna 1710
MHz to 2170
MHz (UP),
2500 MHz to
26900 MHz/
690 MHz to
960 MHz
(DOWN)

The RU3952m is used by 2.1


GHz to support interfrequency mutual aid. It
provides the maximum output
power of 2x60 W, works in 2.1
GHz 2T2R+1.8 GHz 2R
mode, and uses only A/B ports.

Each sector is
configured with
one AAU.

The RU3952m is used by 1.8


GHz to support interfrequency mutual aid. It
provides the maximum output
power of 2x60 W, works in 1.8
GHz 2T2R+2.1 GHz 2R
mode, and uses only A/B ports.

For carrier power


specifications of
the RU3952m, see
technical
specifications of
the RRU3952m.

Working frequency bands:


2.1 GHz: UL 1920 MHz to
1980 MHz; DL 2110 MHz to
2170 MHz
1.8 GHz: UL 1710 MHz to
1785 MHz; DL 1805 MHz to
1880 MHz
l 1.8 GHz supports the
GSM, LTE, or GL mode.
2.1 GHz supports the
UMTS mode.
l It can provide the
following wideband
antennas for external
RRUs or RFUs: 4-port 2.6
GHz antenna (the ports are
on the bottom of the
antenna), and 2-port 700
MHz to 900 MHz antenna
(the ports are on the bottom
of the antenna).

4.4.5 AAU3940 Configurations


This section describes configuration principles and typical configurations of the AAU3940.

Principles for configuring an AAU3940


The AAU3940 configuration principles are as follows:
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Each sector needs to be configured with an AAU3940. The number of RF modules is


determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.

The AAU3940 is an antenna with horizontal beamwidth of 70, and therefore does not
apply to an omni-directional site.

The AAU3940 only applies to sectorized cells. Each sector requires at most one AAU3940.
The AAU3940 is applicable to a cell that is partitioned into a maximum of three sectors.

The AAU3940 does not support mechanical tilt but only supports electrical tilt. The
horizontal angle of the AAU3940 is adjusted using mounting kits.

The AAU3940 only supports one AC input, which is applied in AC power supply scenarios.
The DC power supply is not supported. The AAU3940 also supports 10 kA differential
mode and 20 kA common mode with surge protection capabilities.

The AAU3940 can be used together with the BBU3900, BBU3910, or BBU3910A.

Configuration principle of CPRI ports


l

The AAU3940 provides two CPRI ports, which support a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s, 2.5 Gbit/s,
4.9 Gbit/s, or 9.8 Gbit/s.

The AAU3940 supports dual-band and UL dual-mode. The dual-star, star, and chain
topologies are used for CPRI connection.

In remote networking scenarios, the star topology for CPRI connection is recommended
for a base station located on a rooftop. A cascading way is recommended for a base station
located along the streets to reduce fiber optic cables.

Optical modules supporting a CPRI data of 9.8 Gbit/s are recommended.

Typical configurations of an AAU3940


The following table shows the configuration of carriers on the AAU3940.
Table 4-55 Carrier specifications of AAU3940
Description

Function

Working
Mode

Configuration Capacity

1.8 GHz (LTE)


+2.1 GHz (LTE
+UMTS)

1.8 GHz (UL: 1710~1785 MHz,


DL: 1805~1880 MHz)+2.1 GHz
(UL: 1920~1980 MHz, DL:
2110~2170 MHz)

UMTS only

Six 1T2R carriers or four 2T2R


carriers

LTE only

2x20 MHz 2T2R

UL

Four UMTS 1T2R carriers and two


LTE 20 MHz 2T2R carriers

The following table lists AAU3940 configuration.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-56 AAU3940 configuration


Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration
Principle

WD7MAA
U39400

Function ModuleAAU3940WD7MIRTA7X0
C-FDD Multicarrier RF
transceiver
(2*2*20W TX:
1805-1880MHz,R
X:
1710-1785MHz/
TX:
2110-2170MHz,R
X:
1920-1980MHz,
10G, 220VAC,
14/14.5dBi,-3-12d
eg RET)

1.8 G+2.1 G (2T2R):

Each sector is configured


with one AAU.

l uses wideband module 2T2R. The


maximum output power is 2x20
W.
l TX: 1805-1880 MHz, RX:
1710-1785 MHz/TX: 2110-2170
MHz, RX: 1920-1980 MHz

For carrier power


specifications of the
AAU3940, see technical
specifications of the
AAU3940.

l It can work in UMTS mode.

4.5 Cabinet Upgrade


The cabinet upgrade solution aims to replace components in a cabinet whose version is earlier
than Ver.D with components designed for a Ver.D cabinet so that the restructured cabinet has
the same capabilities of power supply, power distribution, and heat dissipation as a Ver.D
cabinet. This solution facilitates the evolution to SingleRAN.

BTS3900
The following table lists the configuration of BTS3900 cabinet upgrade packages.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-57 BTS3900 cabinet upgrade packages


External
Model

Description

Function

Maximu
m
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD2B00A
D4800

BTS3900 Cabinet
Upgrade Package
(Ver.A to Ver.D,
-48VDC)

This package is
used to upgrade
a BTS3900
(Ver.A) cabinet
to a BTS3900
(Ver.D) cabinet
in -48 V DC
scenarios.

l Optional.

This package is
used to upgrade
a BTS3900
(Ver.B) cabinet
to a BTS3900
(Ver.D) cabinet
in -48 V DC
scenarios.

WD2B00B
D4800

BTS3900 Cabinet
Upgrade Package
(Ver.B to Ver.D,
-48VDC)

l When a BTS3900 (Ver.A) cabinet


supplied with -48 V power is upgraded,
one package is configured for the
cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the BTS3900
cabinet upgrade, such as the DCDU
and fans.
l Optional.
l When a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet
supplied with -48 V power is upgraded,
one package is configured for the
cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the BTS3900
cabinet upgrade, such as the DCDU
and fans.

BTS3900L
The following table lists the configuration of BTS3900L cabinet upgrade packages.
Table 4-58 BTS3900L cabinet upgrade packages
External
Model

Description

Function

Maximu
m
Quantity

Configuration Principle

WD2B0LBD
4800

BTS3900L Cabinet
Upgrade Package
(Ver.B to Ver.D,
-48VDC)

This package is
used to upgrade
a BTS3900L
(Ver.B) cabinet
to a BTS3900L
(Ver.D) cabinet
in -48 V DC
scenarios.

l Optional.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

l When a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet


supplied with -48 V power is upgraded,
one package is configured for the
cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the
BTS3900L cabinet upgrade, such as
the DCDU and fans.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

BTS3900A
The following table lists the configuration of BTS3900A cabinet upgrade packages.
The battery cabinet for the original base station also needs to be upgraded. For details about the
configuration of battery cabinet upgrade packages, see related APM30 configuration manuals.
Table 4-59 BTS3900A (Ver.A) cabinet upgrade packages
External
Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quanti
ty

Configuration Principle

WD2B220A
2D00

APM30H Cabinet
Upgrade Package
(Ver.A.1 to Ver.D,
220VAC,
BTS3900A)

This package is
used to upgrade
an APM30
(Ver.A 301) to
an APM30
(Ver.D) at a 220
V AC
BTS3900A site.

l Optional.

APM30H Cabinet
Upgrade Package
(Ver.A.1 to Ver.D,
110VAC,
BTS3900A)

This package is
used to upgrade
an APM30
(Ver.A 301) to
an APM30
(Ver.D) at a 110
V AC
BTS3900A site.

APM30H Cabinet
Upgrade Package
(Ver.A.1 to Ver.D,
-48VDC,
TMC11H,
BTS3900A)

This package is
used to upgrade
an APM30
(Ver.A 301) to
an APM30
(Ver.D) at a -48
V DC
BTS3900A site.

WD2B110A
2D00

WD2BA48A
2D00

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

l When an APM30 (Ver.A 301) at a 220 V


AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the APM30
upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one
PMU. If more than two PSUs are
required, extra PSUs must be quoted.
l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.A 301) at a 110 V
AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the APM30
upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one
PMU. If more than two PSUs are
required, extra PSUs must be quoted.
l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.A 301) at a -48 V
DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the APM30
upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, and fans.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quanti
ty

Configuration Principle

WD2B220A
2D02

APM30H Cabinet
Upgrade Package
(Ver.A.2 to Ver.D,
220VAC,
BTS3900A)

This package is
used to upgrade
an APM30
(Ver.A 302) to
an APM30
(Ver.D) in a 220
V AC
BTS3900A.

l Optional.

APM30H Cabinet
Upgrade Package
(Ver.A.2 to Ver.D,
110VAC,
BTS3900A)

This package is
used to upgrade
an APM30
(Ver.A 302) to
an APM30
(Ver.D) in a 110
V AC
BTS3900A.

APM30H Cabinet
Upgrade Package
(Ver.A.2 to Ver.D,
-48VDC,
TMC11H,
BTS3900A)

This package is
used to upgrade
an APM30
(Ver.A 302) to
an APM30
(Ver.D) in a -48
V AC
BTS3900A.

BTS3900A RFU
Cabinet Upgrade
Package (Ver.A to
Ver.D, -48VDC)

This package is
used to upgrade
an RFC (Ver.A)
to an RFC
(Ver.D) at a -48
V DC
BTS3900A site.

WD2B110A
2D02

WD2BA48A
2D02

WD2BR48A
2D00

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

l When an APM30 (Ver.A 302) at a 220 V


DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the APM30
upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one
PMU. If more than two PSUs are
required, extra PSUs must be quoted.
l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.A 302) at a 110 V
DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the APM30
upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one
PMU. If more than two PSUs are
required, extra PSUs must be quoted.
l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.A 30) at a -48 V
DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the APM30
upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, and fans.
l Optional.
l When an RFC (Ver.A) at a -48 V DC
BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the RFC
upgrade, such as the DCDU and fans.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-60 BTS3900A (Ver.B) cabinet upgrade packages


External
Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

WD2B220
B2D00

APM30H Cabinet
Upgrade Package
(Ver.B to Ver.D,
220VAC,
BTS3900A)

This package is
used to upgrade
an APM30
(Ver.B) to an
APM30 (Ver.D)
at a 220 V AC
BTS3900A site.

l Optional.

APM30H Cabinet
Upgrade Package
(Ver.B to Ver.D,
110VAC,
BTS3900A)

This package is
used to upgrade
an APM30
(Ver.B) to an
APM30 (Ver.D)
at a 110 V AC
BTS3900A site.

APM30H Cabinet
Upgrade Package
(Ver.B to Ver.D,
-48VDC, TMC11H,
BTS3900A)

This package is
used to upgrade
an APM30
(Ver.B) to an
APM30 (Ver.D)
at a -48 V DC
BTS3900A site.

BTS3900A RFU
Cabinet Upgrade
Package (Ver.B to
Ver.D, -48VDC)

This package is
used to upgrade
an RFC (Ver.B)
to an RFC
(Ver.D) at a -48
V DC
BTS3900A site.

WD2B110
B2D00

WD2BN48
B2D00

WD2BR48
B2D00

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

l When an APM30 (Ver.B) at a 220 V AC


BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the APM30
upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one
PMU. If more than two PSUs are
required, extra PSUs must be quoted.
l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.B) at a 110 V AC
BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the APM30
upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one
PMU. If more than two PSUs are
required, extra PSUs must be quoted.
l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.B) at a -48 V DC
BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the APM30
upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, and fans.
l Optional.
l When an RFC (Ver.B) at a -48 V DC
BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the RFC
upgrade, such as the DCDU and fans.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-61 BTS3900A (Ver.C) cabinet upgrade packages


External
Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

WD2B220
C2D00

APM30H Cabinet
Upgrade Package
(Ver.C to Ver.D,
220VAC,
BTS3900A)

This package is
used to upgrade
an APM30
(Ver.C) to an
APM30 (Ver.D)
at a 220 V AC
BTS3900A site.

l Optional.

APM30H Cabinet
Upgrade Package
(Ver.C to Ver.D,
110VAC,
BTS3900A)

This package is
used to upgrade
an APM30
(Ver.C) to an
APM30 (Ver.D)
at a 110 V AC
BTS3900A site.

APM30H Cabinet
Upgrade Package
(Ver.C to Ver.D, -48
V DC, TMC11H,
BTS3900A)

This package is
used to upgrade
an APM30
(Ver.C) to an
APM30 (Ver.D)
at a -48 V DC
BTS3900A site.

BTS3900A RFU
Cabinet Upgrade
Package (Ver.C to
Ver.D, -48 V DC)

This package is
used to upgrade
an RFC (Ver.C)
to an RFC
(Ver.D) at a -48
V DC
BTS3900A site.

WD2B110
C2D00

WD2BC48
C2D00

WD2BR48
C2D00

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

l When an APM30 (Ver.C) at a 220 V AC


BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the APM30
upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one
PMU. If more than two PSUs are
required, extra PSUs must be quoted.
l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.C) at a 110 V AC
BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the APM30
upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one
PMU. If more than two PSUs are
required, extra PSUs must be quoted.
l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.C) at a -48 V DC
BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the APM30
upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, and fans.
l Optional.
l When an RFC (Ver.C) at a -48 V DC
BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package includes all
materials required during the RFC
upgrade, such as the DCDU and fans.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

4.6 Power Module


This section describes configuration principles for the power modules used by 3900 series base
stations.

BTS3900
The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900.
Table 4-62 Principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900
External
Model

Description

Function

Maxi
mum
Qua
ntity

Configuration Principle

DCDU03B
00000

DC power
distribution
unit

A DCDU-03B
provides three
12 A and six 20
A DC power
outputs.

l Optional.
l The DCDU-03B provides power for low-power
RRUs. It cannot provide power for high-power
RRUs, including RRU3829, RRU3929,
RRU3942, RRU3841, RRU3961, RRU3832,
RRU3939, and RRU3839.
l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A+3x12 A power
outputs.
l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of
6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same
sector are considered as one RRU.

DCDU11B
00000

DC power
distribution
unit

DC power
distribution
box
(DCDU-11B).
It provides ten
25 A DC power
inputs.

l Optional.
l The DCDU-11B is required in a macro+distributed
base station.
l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A power output ports,
among which six ports use big tool-less female
connectors (pressfit type) and four ports use small
tool-less female connectors (pressfit type).
l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of
6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same
sector are considered as one RRU.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Description

Function

Maxi
mum
Qua
ntity

Configuration Principle

TD1MDC
DU12B0

DC power
distribution
unit

DC power
distribution
box
(DCDU-12B).
This module is
used in DC
cabinets and
provides ten 30
A circuit
breakers.

l Optional.

Power supply
module, used
for converting
AC power to
-48 V DC
power.

Power supply
module, used
for converting
AC power to
-48 V DC
power.

Power supply
module, used
for converting
AC power to
-48 V DC
power.

Power module,
used for
converting +24
V DC power to
-48 V DC
power.

W0ACPSU
00

WPSU50A
01

WD2MR48
50G00

W0DCPSU
00

PSU Module
(AC/DC), 30 A

PSU Module
(AC/DC), 50 A

PSU module
(AC/DC)

PSU Module
(DC/DC)

l The DCDU-12B is required in a macro+distributed


base station.
l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers
(using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or
EPC6 connectors).

l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.B.


l In AC power supply scenarios, the original power
supply system contains two PSUs. When more
than two PSUs are required, one or more PSU
packages need to be configured.
l Each package contains a PSU.
l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.C.
l The power supply capacity of a PSU is 2900 W.
The number of PSUs to be configured depends on
the total power consumption.
l In AC input scenarios, the power system contains
two PSUs by default and a maximum of one PSU
can be added to each single cabinet.
l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.D.
l The power supply capacity of a PSU is 3000 W.
The number of PSUs to be configured depends on
the total power consumption.
l In AC input scenarios, the power equipment
houses two PSUs by default, and a maximum of
three PSUs can be added to a cabinet.
l It is optionally configured in Ver.B cabinets
supplied with +24 V DC power.
l In +24 V DC input scenarios, the power equipment
houses two PSUs by default, and this module needs
to be configured when more than two PSUs are
required. A maximum of two PSUs can be added
to a cabinet.
l Each package contains one PSU.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Description

Function

Maxi
mum
Qua
ntity

Configuration Principle

WD2M000
PEU03

-48 V Power
and
Environment
Interface Unit

UPEUc, power
module in the
BBU,
providing 360
W power for
boards in a
BBU. In
addition, it
provides eight
external dry
contact alarm
ports.

l Optional.

UPEUd, power
module in the
BBU,
providing 650
W power for
boards in a
BBU. In
addition, it
provides eight
external dry
contact alarm
ports. It applies
only to the
BBU3910.

WD2M00P
EIUD2

-48 V Power
and
Environment
Interface Unit

l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by


default. One more UPEUc is required if the total
power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is
more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power
backup of less than 360 W.
l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the
UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default
UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.

l Optional.
l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by
default. One more UPEUd is required if the total
power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is
more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power
backup of less than 650 W.
l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the
UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default
UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.

BTS3900L
The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900L.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-63 Principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900L


External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

DCDU03
B00000

DC power
distribution
unit

A DCDU-03B
provides three 12
A and six 20 A
DC power
outputs.

l Optional.
l The DCDU-03B provides power for low-power
RRUs. It cannot provide power for high-power
RRUs, including RRU3829, RRU3929,
RRU3942, RRU3841, RRU3961, RRU3832,
RRU3939, and RRU3839.
l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A+3x12 A power
outputs.
l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum
of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the
same sector are considered as one RRU.

DCDU11
B00000

DC power
distribution
unit

DC power
distribution box
(DCDU-11B). It
provides ten 25 A
DC power inputs.

l Optional.
l The DCDU-11B is required in a macro
+distributed base station.
l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A power output
ports, among which six ports use big tool-less
female connectors (pressfit type) and four ports
use small tool-less female connectors (pressfit
type).
l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum
of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the
same sector are considered as one RRU.

TD1MD
CDU12B
0

WD2MR
4850G00

DC power
distribution
unit

PSU module
(AC/DC)

DC power
distribution box
(DCDU-12B). It
provides ten 30 A
circuit breakers.

Power supply
module, used for
converting AC
power to -48 V
DC power.

l Optional.
l The DCDU-12B is required in a macro
+distributed base station.
l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers
(using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or
EPC6 connectors).
l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of
Ver.D.
l The power supply capacity of a PSU is 3000 W.
The number of PSUs to be configured depends on
the total power consumption.
l In AC input scenarios, the power equipment
houses two PSUs by default, and a maximum of
three PSUs can be added to a cabinet.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

WD2M0
00PEU03

-48 V Power
and
Environmen
t Interface
Unit

UPEUc, power
module in the
BBU, providing
360 W power for
boards in a BBU.
In addition, it
provides eight
external dry
contact alarm
ports.

l Optional.

UPEUd, power
module in the
BBU, providing
650 W power for
boards in a BBU.
In addition, it
provides eight
external dry
contact alarm
ports. It applies
only to the
BBU3910.

WD2M0
0PEIUD2

-48 V Power
and
Environmen
t Interface
Unit

l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by


default. One more UPEUc is required if the total
power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is
more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power
backup of less than 360 W.
l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the
UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default
UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.
l Optional.
l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by
default. One more UPEUd is required if the total
power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is
more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power
backup of less than 650 W.
l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the
UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default
UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.

BTS3900A
The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900A.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-64 Principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900A


External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

DCDU03
B00000

DC power
distribution
unit

A DCDU-03B
provides three 12
A and six 20 A
DC power
outputs.

l Optional.
l The DCDU-03B provides power for low-power
RRUs. It cannot provide power for high-power
RRUs, including RRU3829, RRU3929,
RRU3942, RRU3841, RRU3961, RRU3832,
RRU3939, and RRU3839.
l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A+3x12 A power
outputs.
l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum
of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the
same sector are considered as one RRU.

DCDU11
B00000

DC power
distribution
unit

DC power
distribution box
(DCDU-11B). It
provides ten 25 A
DC power inputs.

l Optional.
l The DCDU-11B is required in a macro
+distributed base station.
l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A power output
ports, among which six ports use big tool-less
female connectors (pressfit type) and four ports
use small tool-less female connectors (pressfit
type).
l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum
of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the
same sector are considered as one RRU.

TD1MD
CDU12B
0

WD2ME
1PDU01
D

DC power
distribution
unit

Power
Distribution
Unit

DC power
distribution box
(DCDU-12B). It
provides ten 30 A
circuit breakers.

Power
distribution box
(PDU01D-01)

l Optional.
l The DCDU-12B is required in a macro
+distributed base station.
l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers
(using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or
EPC6 connectors).
l Optional.
l Each PDU01D-01 provides power for a
maximum of six RRUs and needs to be used
together with an ODM.
l Each PDU01D-01 supports 1x100 A power.

WD2ME
2PDU03
D

Power
Distribution
Unit

Power
distribution box
(PDU03D-02)

l Optional.
l Each PDU03D-02 provides power for three
RRUs.
l Each PDU03D-02 supports 3x30 A power.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

W0ACPS
U00

PSU Module
(AC/DC),
30 A

Power supply
module, used for
converting AC
power to -48 V
DC power.

A
maximu
m of one
piece
can be
configur
ed.

l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of


Ver.B.

A
maximu
m of one
piece
can be
configur
ed.

l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of


Ver.C.

A
maximu
m of
three
pieces
can be
configur
ed.

l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of


Ver.D.

l Optional.

WPSU50
A01

WD2MR
4850G00

WD2M00
0PEU03

PSU Module
(AC/DC),
50 A

PSU module
(AC/DC)

-48 V Power
and
Environmen
t Interface
Unit

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Power supply
module, used for
converting AC
power to -48 V
DC power.

Power supply
module, used for
converting AC
power to -48 V
DC power.

UPEUc, power
module in the
BBU, providing
360 W power for
boards in a BBU.
In addition, it
provides eight
external dry
contact alarm
ports.

l In AC input scenarios, the power system contains


two PSUs by default and a maximum of one PSU
can be added to each single cabinet.
l A PSU provides a power supply of 1600 W. The
actual configuration quantity depends on the total
power consumption of the equipment. One
additional PSU is required at sites where a diesel
generator is used.

l In AC input scenarios, the power system contains


two PSUs by default and a maximum of one PSU
can be added to each single cabinet.
l A PSU provides a power supply of 2900 W. The
actual quantity to be configured depends on the
total power consumption of the equipment. One
additional PSU is required at sites where a diesel
generator is used.

l In AC input scenarios, the power equipment


houses two PSUs by default, and a maximum of
three PSUs can be added to a cabinet.
l A PSU provides a power supply of 3000 W. The
actual quantity to be configured depends on the
total power consumption of the equipment. Each
AC cabinet is configured with at least three PSUs
(including the two PSUs in the original power
system) at a site where a diesel generator is used.

l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by


default. One more UPEUc is required if the total
power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is
more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power
backup of less than 360 W.
l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the
UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default
UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

WD2M00
PEIUD2

-48 V Power
and
Environmen
t Interface
Unit

UPEUd, power
module in the
BBU, providing
650 W power for
boards in a BBU.
In addition, it
provides eight
external dry
contact alarm
ports. It applies
only to the
BBU3910.

l Optional.
l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by
default. One more UPEUd is required if the total
power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is
more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power
backup of less than 650 W.
l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the
UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default
UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.

BTS3900AL
The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900AL.
Table 4-65 Principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900AL
External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

WD2P00
0PEU00

-48 V Power
and
Environmen
t Interface
Unit

UPEUc, power
module in the
BBU, providing
360 W power for
boards in a BBU.
In addition, it
provides eight
external dry
contact alarm
ports.

l Optional.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by


default. One more UPEUc is required if the total
power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is
more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power
backup of less than 360 W.
l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the
UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default
UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

WD2P00
PEUD00

-48 V Power
and
Environmen
t Interface
Unit

UPEUd, power
module in the
BBU, providing
650 W power for
boards in a BBU.
In addition, it
provides eight
external dry
contact alarm
ports and applies
only to the
BBU3910.

l Optional.

WD2MR
4850G00

PSU Module Power supply


(AC/DC), 50 module, used for
A
converting AC
power to -48 V
DC power.

l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by


default. One more UPEUd is required if the total
power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is
more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power
backup of less than 650 W.
l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the
UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default
UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.

A
maximu
m of five
pieces
can be
configur
ed.

l Optional components in the AC cabinet


l The power supply capacity of a PSU is 3000 W.
The number of PSUs to be configured depends on
the total power consumption.
l In AC power supply scenarios, the original power
supply system contains two PSUs, and a
maximum of five PSUs can be added to a cabinet.
l Each AC cabinet is configured with at least three
PSUs (including the two PSUs in the original
power system) at a site where a diesel generator
is used.

DCDU12
BPAC00

DCDU12
BPDC00

DC Power
Distribution
Unit (AC
Cabinet)

DC Power
Distribution
Unit (DC
Cabinet)

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

DC power
2
distribution box
(DCDU-12B).
This module is
used in an AC
cabinet and
provides ten 30 A
circuit breakers.

l Optional.

DC power
2
distribution box
(DCDU-12B). It
is used in DC
cabinets and
provides ten 30 A
circuit breakers.

l Optional.

l When a BTS3900AL AC cabinet is configured


with DC RRUs, a DCDU-12B is required for
every six DC RRUs.
l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers
(using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or
EPC6 connectors).

l When a BTS3900AL DC cabinet is configured


with DC RRUs, a DCDU-12B is required for
every six DC RRUs.
l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers
(using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or
EPC6 connectors).

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

DBS3900
The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the DBS3900.
Table 4-66 Principles for configuring power modules in the DBS3900
External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

DCDU03
B00000

DC power
distribution
unit

DC power
distribution box
(DCDU-03B)

l Optional.
l The DCDU-03B can be used if the site is not
configured with RRU3829, RRU3929,
RRU3942, RRU3841, RRU3961, RRU3832,
RRU3939, or RRU3839.
l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A+3x12 A power
outputs.
l Each DCDU-11B can provide power for a
maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004
modules in the same sector are considered as one
RRU.

DCDU11
B00000

DC power
distribution
unit

DC power
3
distribution box
(DCDU-11B). It
provides ten 25 A
DC power
outputs. Each
DCDU supports a
maximum of six
groups of power
cables for DC
RRUs.

l Optional.
l The DCDU-11B can be used if the site is
configured with RRU3829, RRU3929,
RRU3942, RRU3841, RRU3961, RRU3832,
RRU3939, or RRU3839.
l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A power output
ports, among which six ports use big tool-less
female connectors (pressfit type) and four ports
use small tool-less female connectors (pressfit
type).
l Each DCDU-11B can provide power for a
maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004
modules in the same sector are considered as one
RRU.

TD1MD
CDU12B
0

WD5PM
PW80000

DC power
distribution
unit

AC/DC
RRU power
module

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

DC power
3
distribution box
(DCDU-12B).
Each DCDU
provides ten 30 A
circuit breakers.

l Optional.

AC/DC RRU
power module

l Optional.

l Each DCDU-12B can provide power for a


maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004
modules in the same sector are considered as one
RRU.
l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers
(using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or
EPC6 connectors).

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

WD5PA
CDCPM0
0

AC/DC
RRU power
module

AC/DC power
module for a
blade RRU

l When an AC RRU consists of an RRU3824/


RRU3826/RRU3929/RRU3926/RRU3936/
RRU3838/RRU3832/RRU3260/RRU3268/
RRU3938/RRU3939 and an AC/DC module, this
module must be quoted. Each AC RRU is
configured with one of this module.
l WD5PMPW80000 is replaced by
WD5PACDCPM00.

WD2M00
0PEU03

WD2M00
PEIUD2

-48 V Power
and
Environmen
t Interface
Unit

-48 V Power
and
Environmen
t Interface
Unit

UPEUc, power
module in the
BBU, providing
360 W power for
boards in a BBU.
In addition, it
provides eight
external dry
contact alarm
ports.

UPEUd, power
module in the
BBU, providing
650 W power for
boards in a BBU.
In addition, it
provides eight
external dry
contact alarm
ports and applies
only to
BBU3910.

l Optional.
l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by
default. One more UPEUc is required if the total
power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is
more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power
backup of less than 360 W.
l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the
UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default
UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.
l Optional.
l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by
default. One more UPEUd is required if the total
power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is
more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power
backup of less than 650 W.
l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the
UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default
UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.

BTS3900C
The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900C.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-67 Principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900C


External
Model

Descriptio
n

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

WD2P00
0PEU01

-48 V Power
and
Environmen
t Interface
Unit

UPEUc, power
module in the
BBU, providing
360 W power for
boards in a BBU.
In addition, it
provides eight
external dry
contact alarm
ports.

l Optional.

UPEUd, power
module in the
BBU, providing
650 W power for
boards in a BBU.
In addition, it
provides eight
external dry
contact alarm
ports and applies
only to
BBU3910.

WD2P00
PEUD01

-48 V Power
and
Environmen
t Interface
Unit

l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by


default. One more UPEUc is required if the total
power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is
more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power
backup of less than 360 W.
l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the
UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default
UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.
l Optional.
l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by
default. One more UPEUd is required if the total
power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is
more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power
backup of less than 650 W.
l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the
UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default
UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.

4.7 RET Module Configurations


The following table lists the configurations of an RET module.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-68 Configurations of an RET module


External
Model

Description

Function

Maxi
mum
Quant
ity

Configuration Principle

GM5M00G
ATM00

Antenna and
TMA Control
Unit

RET antenna and TMA


control module

This module is configured when DRFUs


have been configured for GSM mode and
a TMA or RET antenna is in use. When
DRFUs are configured at a site and the
TMA function is required, the GATM
must be configured. Each GATM
supplies power to six BiasTees. When
DRFUs are configured at a site and the
RET antenna is required, the GATM must
be configured. Each GATM supplies
power to three BiasTees.

GSM board

NOTE

In GSM mode, a common TMA cannot be used with an RET antenna, because the overcurrent of RET
antenna adjustment will mistakenly cause a TMA alarm. GBSS12.0 supports a smart TMA which can be
used with an RET antenna.

4.8 Hardware License Configuration


This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for each type of base
station.

4.8.1 Hardware License Configuration of GSM Base Stations


This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for GSM base
stations.
The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for GSM base
stations.
Table 4-69 Hardware license configuration of GSM base stations
External
Model

License
Package
Description

Function

Configuration Principle

GMMS0DR
FUT00

3900 series
DRFU
transceiver
(per TRX)

License for the TRX


of a DRFU in GSM
mode

Each DRFU provides one TRX by default. One license


is configured for each excess TRX.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

It applies to DRFUs.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

License
Package
Description

Function

Configuration Principle

GMMS0GR
FUT00

3900 series
GRFU
transceiver
(per TRX)

License for
providing multiple
TRXs for a GRFU

Each GRFU provides one TRX by default. One license


is configured for each excess TRX.

GSM multiple
transceiver for
the 2nd TRX of
multimode
module

License for the


second GSM TRX of
a multimode RF
module

Each multimode RF module provides one GSM TRX by


default. To enable a multimode RF module to provide two
GSM TRXs, the module needs to be configured with one
license.

GSM multiple
transceiver for
multimode
module

License for multiple


GSM TRXs of a
multimode RF
module

WDMSMU
LTIT00

WDMSMU
LTIT01

It applies to GRFUs.

It applies to multimode RFUs and RRUs.


When a multimode module is configured with more than
two GSM TRXs, the number of licenses to be configured
for the module is the total number of GSM TRXs
configured for the module minus 2.
This license applies to multimode RFUs and RRUs.

GMMS0DR
RUT00

3900 series
RRU3004
transceiver
(per TRX)

RRU3004 dual
transceiver license

Each RRU3004 supports one TRX by default. An


RRU3004 that supports two carriers requires a doubletransceiver license.

GMMS0GR
RUT00

3900 series
RRU3008
transceiver
(per TRX)

RRU3008 multiTRX license

Each RRU3008 supports one TRX by default. The


number of multi-TRX licenses is one less than the
number of TRXs supported by an RRU3008.

GMMSMC
60HP00

Multi Carrier
60 W High
Power License
(per TRX)

Each TRX of a
multi-carrier module
supports 60 W
transmit power.

One package is configured for each GSM carrier whose


transmit power is greater than or equal to 60 W and is
smaller than 80 W.

Multi Carrier
80 W High
Power License
(per TRX)

Each TRX of a
multi-carrier module
supports 80 W
transmit power.

One package is configured for each GSM carrier whose


transmit power is greater than or equal to 80 W. This
package does not contain the license package of Multi
Carrier 60 W High Power License for Blade&AAU (per
TRX).

GMMSMC
80HP00

For the RF module where the transmit power of each


channel is greater than or equal to 60 W, the Multi Carrier
60 W High Power License is supported.

For the RF module where the transmit power of each


channel is greater than or equal to 80 W, the Multi Carrier
80 W High Power License is supported.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

License
Package
Description

Function

Configuration Principle

WDMSMU
LTIT03

GSM Multiple
Transceiver
for the 2nd
TRX of MultiMode
Blade&AAU

License for the


second GSM TRX of
a multimode RF
module (AAU or
blade RRU)

Each multimode RF module provides one GSM TRX by


default. To enable a multimode RF module to provide two
GSM TRXs, the module needs to be configured with one
license.

GSM Multiple
Transceiver
for MultiMode
Blade&AAU

License for multiple


GSM TRXs of a
multimode RF
module (AAU or
blade RRU)

This license is configured when a multimode module is


configured with more than two GSM TRXs. The number
of licenses to be configured for the module equals the
total number of GSM TRXs configured for the module
minus 2.

WDMSMU
LTIT02

This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU.

This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU.


GMMSMC
60HP01

GMMSMC
80HP01

Multi Carrier
60 W High
Power License
for
Blade&AAU
(per TRX)

Each TRX of a
multi-TRX module
(AAU or blade
RRU) supports 60 W
transmit power.

One package is configured for each GSM carrier whose


transmit power is greater than or equal to 60 W and is
smaller than 80 W.

Multi Carrier
80 W High
Power License
for
Blade&AAU
(per TRX)

Each TRX of a
multi-TRX module
(AAU or blade
RRU) supports 80 W
transmit power.

One package is configured for each GSM carrier whose


transmit power is greater than or equal to 80 W. This
package does not contain the license package of Multi
Carrier 60 W High Power License for Blade&AAU (per
TRX).

This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU.

For the RF module where the transmit power of each


channel is greater than or equal to 80 W, the Multi Carrier
80 W High Power License is supported.
This license applies only to AAUs and blade RRUs.

4.8.2 Hardware License Configuration of UMTS Base Stations


This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for UMTS base
stations.
The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for UMTS base
stations.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-70 Hardware license configuration of UMTS base stations


External
Model

License
Package
Description

Function

Configuration Principle

QWMS000U
CE01

UL CE License
for 0 CEs to 64
CEs (per 16 CEs)

This license is
configured for the
UMTS mode. It is
used for uplink
CEs and quoted in
a step-wise
manner.

Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four


licenses can be configured.

QWMS000U
CE02

QWMS000U
CE03

QWMS000U
CE04

QWMS000D
CE01

QWMS000D
CE02

QWMS000D
CE03

QWMS000D
CE04

l It is configured when less than or equal to 64 CEs


are required.
l Four licenses are configured when more than 64
CEs are required.

UL CE License
for 64 CEs to 128
CEs (per 16 CEs)

Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four


licenses can be configured.

UL CE License
for 128 CEs to
192 CEs (per 16
CEs)

Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four


licenses can be configured.

UL CE License
for more than 192
CEs (per 16 CEs)

Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four


licenses can be configured.

DL CE License
for 0 CEs to 64
CEs (per 16 CEs)

It is configured for the 65th to 128th CEs.

It is configured for the 129th to 192nd CEs.

It is configured when more than 192 CEs are required.


This license is
configured for the
UMTS mode. It is
used for downlink
CEs and quoted in
a step-wise
manner.

Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four


licenses can be configured.
l It is configured when less than or equal to 64 CEs
are required.
l Four licenses are configured when more than 64
CEs are required.

DL CE License
for 64 CEs to 128
CEs (per 16 CEs)

Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four


licenses can be configured.

DL CE License
for 128 CEs to
192 CEs (per 16
CEs)

Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four


licenses can be configured.

DL CE License
for more than 192
CEs (per 16 CEs)

Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four


licenses can be configured.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

It is configured for the 65th to 128th CEs.

It is configured for the 129th to 192nd CEs.

It is configured when more than 192 CEs are required.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

License
Package
Description

Function

Configuration Principle

QWMS0HDP
AC00

HSDPA Code
(per Code)

HSDPA code
resources

This is a mandatory HSDPA function item. This item


must be configured based on the quantity of the
HSDPA code resources required by the base station.
Each package is one HSDPA code. The minimum
configuration is five HSDPA codes. For a base station,
the maximum number of HSDPA codes that can be
configured equals the number of cells carried by the
base station multiplied by 15.
The number of HSDPA codes required by a base station
must be a multiple of 5.

QWMS000M
CA00

Multi Carrier
License (per
Carrier)

Multi-carrier
function for the
UMTS mode

A license for one carrier is included in the hardware


quotation for each RF module of the base station. When
the module has more than one carrier, one package
needs to be configured for each excess carrier.
It applies to the WRFU, WRFUd, and RRU in UMTS
mode.

QWMS0000P
A00

Power License
(per 20 W)

License package
for 20 W power

A license for 20 W power is included in the hardware


quotation for each RF module of the base station. When
the power exceeds 20 W, one package needs to be
configured for each excess part of 20 W power.

WDMS000M
CA00

WCDMA Multi
Carrier License
for the 1st Carrier
of Multi-Mode
Module (per
Carrier)

License for the


first carrier of the
UMTS mode in a
multimode RF
module

The quotation of a multimode RF module does not


include a license for UMTS carriers. Therefore, one
license is configured for the first UMTS carrier of each
module.

WCDMA Multi
Carrier License
for Multi-Mode
Module (per
Carrier)

License for
multiple UMTS
carriers of a
multimode RF
module

The quotation of a multimode RF module does not


include a license for UMTS carriers. Therefore, one
license is configured for each of the second to fourth
UMTS carriers of each module.

UMTS NodeB
Signaling
Capacity License
(per 50 CNBAP/
s)

UMTS signaling
capacity license

It is configured when the signaling capacity of a base


station exceeds 350 CNBAP/s. Each license contains a
signaling capacity of 50 CNBAP/s.

Multi Carrier
License for
Blade&AAU
(per Carrier)

Multi-carrier
function for the
UMTS mode of an
AAU or blade
RRU

WDMS000M
CA01

QWMS00UN
SC00

QWMS000M
CA01

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

This license applies to multimode RF modules.

This license applies to multimode RF modules.

This license is supported from SRAN7.0/RAN14.0


onwards.
A license for one carrier is included in the hardware
quotation for each RF module of the base station. When
the module has more than one carrier, one package
needs to be configured for each excess carrier.
This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

License
Package
Description

Function

Configuration Principle

QWMS0000P
A01

Power License
for Blade&AAU
(per 20 W)

License package
for 20 W power of
an AAU or blade
RRU

A license for 20 W power is included in the hardware


quotation for each RF module of the base station. When
the power exceeds 20 W, one package needs to be
configured for each excess part of 20 W power.
This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU.

WDMS000M
CA03

WDMS000M
CA02

WCDMA Multi
Carrier License
for the 1st Carrier
of Multi-Mode
Blade&AAU
(per Carrier)

License for the


first UMTS carrier
of a multimode RF
module (AAU or
blade RRU)

The license package for each UMTS carrier is not


included in a multimode module, but configured for the
first UMTS carrier of each multimode module. One
license is required for each UMTS carrier.

WCDMA Multi
Carrier License
for Multi-Mode
Blade&AAU
(per Carrier)

License for
multiple UMTS
carriers of a
multimode RF
module (AAU or
blade RRU)

The license package for each UMTS carrier is not


included in a multimode module. It is configured for
the second to fourth carriers for each multimode
module. One license is required for each UMTS carrier.

This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade


RRU.

This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade


RRU.

4.8.3 Hardware License Configuration of LTE Base Stations


This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for LTE base stations.
The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for LTE base
stations.
Table 4-71 Hardware license configuration of LTE base stations
External
Model

License
Package
Description

Function

Configuration Principle

LT1S0000P
A00

RF Output
Power (per 20
W)

Power license
package for RF
modules

A license for 20 W power is included in the hardware


quotation for each RF module of the base station. When
the power exceeds 20 W, one package needs to be
configured for each excess part of 20 W power.

LT1S000M
CA00

LTE Multi
Carrier (per
Carrier)

Multi-carrier
license package
for RF modules

The quotation for each RF module includes one carrier by


default. When more than one carrier is used by an RF
module, one package is configured for every additional
carrier.
It applies to RF modules with multiple carriers.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

License
Package
Description

Function

Configuration Principle

LT1S005M
HZ00

Carrier
Bandwidth - 0
MHz to 5 MHz

Capacity Carrier
Bandwidth
licence (per cell)
for RF modules

l When a cell uses less than or equal to 5 MHz


bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell.
l When a cell uses 10 MHz bandwidth, one license is
configured for the cell.
l When a cell uses 15MHz bandwidth, one license is
configured for the cell.
l When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one license is
configured for the cell.
This license applies to multimode RFUs and RRUs.

LT1S010M
HZ00

Carrier
Bandwidth - 5
MHz to 10
MHz

Carrier bandwidth l When a cell uses 10 MHz bandwidth, one license is


licence (per cell)
configured for the cell.
for RF modules
l When a cell uses 15 MHz bandwidth, one license is
configured for the cell.
l When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one license is
configured for the cell.
This license applies to multimode RFUs and RRUs.

LT1S015M
HZ00

Carrier
Bandwidth - 10
MHz to 15
MHz

Carrier bandwidth l When a cell uses 15 MHz bandwidth, one license is


licence (per cell)
configured for the cell.
for RF modules
l When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one license is
configured for the cell.

LT1S020M
HZ00

Carrier
Bandwidth - 15
MHz to 20
MHz

Carrier bandwidth When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one license is


licence (per cell)
configured for the cell.
for RF modules

LT1S0ACT
US00

RRC connected
User

License for the


baseband
processing
capacity of
RRC_connected
users (per
RRC_connected
user)

This package is configured based on the network plan.


Each cell is configured with the licenses for a minimum of
6 RRC_connected users, and the number of
RRC_connected users increases with a step of 6. A
maximum of 5400 RRC_connected users are allowed.

License for the


throughput
capacity of the
baseband
processing
module (per Mbit/
s)

This package is configured based on the network plan.


Each cell is configured with a minimum of 5 Mbit/s, and
the capacity increases with a step of 5 Mbit/s. The
maximum capacity is 750 Mbit/s.

LT1S0THR
OU00

Throughput
Capacity

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

For example, a S1/1/1 base station is configured with a


minimum of 18 (equal to 3x6) RRC_connected users.

For example, a S1/1/1 base station is configured with a


minimum of 15 Mbit/s (equal to 3 x 5 Mbit/s).

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

License
Package
Description

Function

Configuration Principle

LT1S0000R
B00

Resource
Block

Resource Block
(per RB)

Assume that N specifies the number of required packages


per cell. The total number of packages equals N multiplied
by the number of cells. N is determined by the cell
bandwidth as follows:
l 1.4 MHz: N is 6.
l 3 MHz: N is 15.
l 5 MHz: N is 25.
l 10 MHz: N is 50.
l 15 MHz: N is 75.
l 20 MHz: N is 100.
In multi-carrier scenarios, the number of required
packages is calculated on a per-carrier basis. The total
number of packages is the sum of the calculation results.
This package applies only to the LBBPd.

LT1S00BBT
C00

BB Transmit
Channel

BB Transmit
Channel (per
Channel)

This package is configured when the LBBPd2 requires


more than two transmit channels. The quotation for an
LBBPd2 includes two transmit channels per cell. When the
number of transmit channels exceeds 2, one package is
required for each transmit channel added. The number of
required packages is calculated using the following
formula:
Number of packages required for one LBBPd2 = Number
of sectors with more than two transmit channels x (Number
of transmit channels - 2) x Number of carriers
This license only applies to the LBBPc, LBBPd2,
UBBPd4, UBBPd5, and UBBPd6.

LT1S00BBR
C00

BB Receive
Channel

BB Receive
Channel (per
Channel)

This package is configured when the LBBPd2 requires


more than two receive channels. Each baseband board has
been configured with two receive channels per cell.
Therefore, one package is required for every receive
channel added. The number of required packages is
calculated using the following formula:
Number of packages required for one LBBPd2 = Number
of sectors with more than two receive channels x (Number
of receive channels - 2) x Number of carriers
This license only applies to the LBBPc, LBBPd2,
UBBPd4, UBBPd5, and UBBPd6.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

License
Package
Description

Function

Configuration Principle

LT1S00RFT
C00

RF Transmit
Channel

RF Transmit
Channel(per
Channel)

This package is required when the RF module has more


than two RF receive channels.
Each RF module has two RF transmit channels. When the
number of RF transmit channels exceeds 2, one package is
required for each added transmit channel.
This package applies only to the RF modules with four
transmit channels (4T RF modules). The number of
licenses to be configured is calculated by the following
formula: Number of licenses to be configured = Number
of RRUs with more than two transmit channels x (Number
of transmit channels of a single RRU - 2)

LT1S00RFR
C00

RF Receive
Channel

RF Receive
Channel (per
Channel)

This package is required when the RF module has more


than two RF receive channels.
Each RF module has two RF transmit channels. When the
number of RF transmit channels exceeds 2, one package is
required for each added transmit channel.
This package applies only to the RF modules with four
receive channels (4R RF modules). The number of licenses
to be configured is calculated by the following formula:
Number of licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs
with more than two receive channels x (Number of receive
channels of a single RRU - 2)

LT1S0000P
A01

RF Output
Power
blade&AAU
(per 20 W)

Power license
package for an
AAU or blade
RRU

A license for 20 W power is included in the hardware


quotation for each RF module of the base station. When
the power exceeds 20 W, one package needs to be
configured for each excess part of 20 W power.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.

LT1S000M
CA01

RF multi
carrier for
blade&AAU
(per carrier)

Multi-carrier
license package
for an AAU or
blade RRU

The quotation for each RF module includes one carrier by


default. When more than one carrier is used by an RF
module, one package is configured for every additional
carrier.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.

LT1S005M
HZ01

Carrier
Bandwidth - 0
MHz to 5 MHz
for
Blade&AAU

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Carrier bandwidth
licence (per cell)
for an AAU or
blade RRU

When a cell uses 10 MHz, 15 MHz, 20 MHz, or less than


or equal to 5 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured
for the cell.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

License
Package
Description

Function

Configuration Principle

LT1S010M
HZ01

Carrier
Bandwidth - 5
MHz to 10
MHz for
Blade&AAU

Carrier bandwidth When a cell uses 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz bandwidth,


licence (per cell)
one license is configured for the cell.
for an AAU or
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
blade RRU

LT1S015M
HZ01

Carrier
Bandwidth - 10
MHz to 15
MHz for
Blade&AAU

Carrier bandwidth When a cell uses 15 MHz or 20 MHz bandwidth, one


licence (per cell)
license is configured for the cell.
for an AAU or
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
blade RRU

LT1S020M
HZ01

Carrier
Bandwidth - 15
MHz to 20
MHz for
Blade&AAU

Carrier bandwidth When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one license is


licence (per cell)
configured for the cell.
for an AAU or
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
blade RRU

LT1S00RFT
C01

RF Transmit
Channel for
blade&AAU

Blade&AAU RF
Transmit Channel
(per Channel)

This package is required when the RF module has more


than two RF transmit channels.
Each RF module has two RF transmit channels. When the
number of RF transmit channels exceeds 2, one package is
required for each added transmit channel.
This package applies only to the RF modules with four
transmit channels (4T RF modules). The number of
licenses to be configured is calculated by the following
formula: Number of licenses to be configured = Number
of RRUs with more than two transmit channels x (Number
of transmit channels of a single RRU - 2)
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.

LT1S00RFR
C01

RF Receive
Channel for
Blade&AAU

Blade&AAU RF
Receive Channel
(per Channel)

This package is required when the RF module has more


than two RF transmit channels.
Each RF module has two RF receive channels. When the
number of RF receive channels exceeds 2, one package is
required for each added receive channel.
This package applies only to the RF modules with four
receive channels (4R RF modules). The number of licenses
to be configured is calculated by the following formula:
Number of licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs
with more than two receive channels x (Number of receive
channels of a single RRU - 2)
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

NOTE

In MIMO scenarios, the power of each module is the product of the number of MIMO channels and the
output power of each channel. For example:
l 2x2 MIMO (2x30 W): Each RRU requires 60 W power and is configured with two RF channels.
l 2x2 MIMO (2x40 W): Each RRU requires 80 W power and is configured with three RF channels.
l 4x2 MIMO (4x40 W): Each RRU requires 80 W power and is configured with three RF channels.
The BBU3900 supports hybrid configuration of the LBBPc, LBBPd1, LBBPd2, LBBPd3, UBBPd3,
UBBPd4, UBBPd5, and UBBPd6.

4.8.4 License Configuration of Multimode Base Stations


This section describes the principles for configuring hardware licenses, co-MPT licenses, and
co-BBP licenses for multimode base stations.

Hardware License Configuration of Multimode Base Stations


The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for multimode base
stations.
Table 4-72 Principles for configuring the hardware licenses for multimode base stations
External
Model

License Package
Description

Function

Configuration Principle

WDMS00GU
DM00

RF GSM/UMTS Dual
Mode license (per sector)

Dual-mode license
for GU RF
modules

One package is configured for each sector


served by a GU RF module.

WDMS00GL
DM00

RF GSM/LTE Dual
Mode license (per sector)

Dual-mode license
for GL RF modules

One package is configured for each sector


served by a GL RF module.

WDMS00UL
DM00

RF UMTS/LTE Dual
Mode license (per sector)

Dual-mode license
for UL RF modules

One package is configured for each sector


served by a UL RF module.

WDMS00GU
DM01

GSM/UMTS Dual Mode


license for Blade&AAU
(per sector)

GU dual-mode
license for an AAU
or blade RRU

In GU dual mode, one package is configured


for each sector.

GSM/LTE Dual Mode


license for Blade&AAU
(per sector)

GL dual-mode
license for an AAU
or blade RRU

In GL dual mode, one package is configured


for each sector.

UMTS/LTE Dual Mode


license for Blade&AAU
(per sector)

UL dual-mode
license for an AAU
or blade RRU

For a UL dual-mode base station, one package


is configured for each sector.

WDMS00GL
DM01

WDMS00UL
DM01

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

This license applies to a multimode AAU or a


blade RRU.

This license applies to a multimode AAU or a


blade RRU.

This license applies to a multimode AAU or a


blade RRU.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Co-MPT License Configuration of Multimode Base Stations


The following table lists the principles for configuring the co-MPT licenses for multimode base
stations.
Table 4-73 Co-MPT license configuration of multimode base stations
External
Model

License Package
Description

Function

Configuration Principle

WDMS0UM
MG00

MPT Multi Mode


license (GSM) (Per
UMPT)

Co-MPT
license for
GSM

Configure this package based on the number of GSM


base stations supported by each UMPT(1). Each base
station can be configured with a maximum of one
such license.

WDMS0UM
MU00

MPT Multi Mode


license (UMTS) (Per
UMPT)

Co-MPT
license for
UMTS

Configure this package based on the number of


UMTS base stations supported by each UMPT(1).
Each base station can be configured with a maximum
of one such license.

WDMS0UM
ML00

MPT Multi Mode


license (LTE FDD) (Per
UMPT)

Co-MPT
license for
LTE

Configure this package based on the number of LTE


base stations supported by each UMPT(1). Each base
station can be configured with a maximum of one
such license.

NOTE

(1) Each UMPT supports one mode by default. One license needs to be added for each additional mode.
When multiple modes are configured for a UMPT, first quote a UMPT for the earliest mode and then add
licenses for later modes. The GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes are arranged from the earliest to the latest as
follows: GSM < UMTS < LTE

Co-BBP License Configuration of Multimode Base Stations


The following table lists the configuration principles for co-BBP licenses of multimode base
stations.
Table 4-74 Configuration principles for co-BBP licenses of multimode base stations
External
Model

License
Package
Description

Function

Configuration Principle

WDMS00UFM
G00

UBBP FirstMode license


(GSM) (per
UBBP)

License for the first


mode (GSM) of the
UBBP

One piece of the license is configured for each


UBBP that uses GSM as its first mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

License
Package
Description

Function

Configuration Principle

WDMS00UMM
G00

UBBP MultiMode license


(GSM) (per
UBBP)

License for adding a


new mode (GSM) of
the UBBP

One piece of this license is configured for each


UBBP to which GSM is added as a new mode
(either replacing the first mode or concurrent with
the first mode).

WDMS00UFM
U00

UBBP FirstMode license


(UMTS) (per
UBBP)

License for the first


mode (UMTS) of the
UBBP

One piece of the license is configured for each


UBBP that uses UMTS as its first mode.

WDMS00UMM
U00

UBBP MultiMode license


(UMTS (per
UBBP)

License for adding a


new mode (UMTS)
of the UBBP

One piece of this license is configured for each


UBBP to which UMTS is added as a new mode
(either replacing the first mode or concurrent with
the first mode).

WDMS0UFML
F00

UBBP FirstMode license


(LTE FDD) (per
UBBP)

License for the first


mode (LTE FDD) of
the UBBP

One piece of the license is configured for each


UBBP that uses LTE FDD as its first mode.

WDMS0UMML
F00

UBBP MultiMode license


(LTE FDD) (per
UBBP)

License for adding a


new mode (LTE
FDD) of the UBBP

One piece of this license is configured for each


UBBP to which LTE FDD is added as a new mode
(either replacing the first mode or concurrent with
the first mode).

(1) In newly deployed single-mode sites, the license for the first mode (UBBP First-Mode license) must be quoted.
(2) In newly deployed multimode sites, if licenses for multiple modes are purchased together, the license for a
higher mode can be purchased with the license for a lower mode for free. The modes are arranged from the lowest
to the highest as follows: GSM > UMTS > LTE FDD > LTE TDD.
(3) In mode transition scenarios such as single mode to single mode, single mode to multimode concurrency, and
multimode concurrency with new mode added, the UBBP Multi-Mode license corresponding to the newly added
mode must be purchased.

4.9 Equipment and Product Auxiliary Material


Configuration
This section describes the principles for configuring the installation and site auxiliary materials.

4.9.1 Configurations of Auxiliary Materials for Installation


This section describes the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials used for installing
3900 series base stations.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Transmission Cables/Packages
The following table lists transmission cables and transmission packages for 3900 series base
stations.
Table 4-75 Auxiliary materials for 3900 series base station installation
Model

Description

Function

Maxi
mum
Quant
ity

Configuration Principle

QWMP0004
E100

Trunk Cable (75


Ohm, 4E1, 10m)

E1 cable

l It needs to be configured when 75 ohm E1


transmission or E1 line clock is used.
l One package is configured for every four
E1s.

QWMP0004
E101

Trunk Cable (120


Ohm, 4E1, 10m)

E1 cable

l It needs to be configured when 120 ohm


E1 transmission or E1 line clock is used.
l One package is configured for every four
E1s.

QWMP0000
FE00

Ethernet Cable

FE/GE cable

l It needs to be configured when FE/GE


electrical ports are used.
l One piece is configured for every FE/GE.

LTIP000FB
R00

Optical Fiber

FE/GE cable

l It needs to be configured when FE/GE


optical ports are used.
l One piece is configured for every FE/GE
(only for Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets).

QWMP0000
FE02

QWMP0000
GE00

Optical Fiber(FE/
STM-1)

Optical Fiber(GE)

FE/STM-1
optical
transmission
package

GE optical
transmission
package

l It needs to be configured when FE/STM-1


optical ports are used.
l One piece is configured for every FE/
STM-1 (only for Ver.D or Ver.E cabinets).
l It needs to be configured when GE optical
ports are used.
l One piece is configured for every GE (only
for Ver.D or Ver.E cabinets).

Jumper Packages
The following table lists jumper packages for 3900 series base stations.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maxi
mum
Quant
ity

Configuration Principle

QWMP000J
MP00

Top Jumper Cable


Unit for RFU

Fixed-length
jumper on the
top of the
cabinet

l Each antenna is configured with one


package when the base station is
configured with RFUs.

Jumper
package for
common areas

QWMP000J
MP02

Top Jumper Cable


Unit for RRU

l The number of packages is determined by


the number of antennas(1).
l This package is used in common areas.
Each antenna in a distributed base station
is configured with one package.
l The number of packages is determined by
the number of antennas(1).

QWMP000J
MP03

Top Jumper Cable


Unit for RRU

Jumper
package for
cold areas

l This package is used in cold areas. Each


antenna in a distributed base station is
configured with one package.
l The number of packages is determined by
the number of antennas(1).

NOTE

(1) The number of antennas to be used in a 4-antenna receive diversity scenario is twice the number of
antennas used in other scenarios.

Installation Packages for BBU Interconnection


The following table lists installation packages for BBU interconnection in 3900 series base
stations.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maxi
mum
Quant
ity

Configuration Principle

WD5PUCIUI
M00

UCIU
Interconnecting
Materials (Internal
Cabinet)

Materials
(including
fiber optical
cables and
optical
modules)
required for
UCIU
interconnectio
n in a 3900
series base
station

This package is optional for a BTS3900L/


BTS3900AL. It is required when BBUs are
interconnected by connecting UCIUs.

WD5PUCIUI
M01

UCIU
Interconnecting
Materials (Internal
Cabinet)

Materials
(including
fiber optical
cables and
optical
modules)
required for
interconnectio
n between
UCIUs in
different 3900
series base
stations

This package is optional for a BTS3900/


BTS3900A/DBS3900. It is required when
BBUs are interconnected by connecting
UCIUs.

WD5PUMPT
IN02

UMPT
Interconnection
Cable,2.0m

Cable of 2 m
(6.56 ft) for
UMPT
interconnectio
n in a 3900
series base
station

This package is optional. It is required when


BBUs are interconnected by connecting
UMPTs. This package is used when two BBUs
are installed in the same cabinet.

WD5PUMPT
IN05

UMPT
Interconnection
Cable,5.0m

Cable of 5 m
(16.40 ft) for
connecting
UMPTs in
different
cabinets in a
3900 series
base station

This package is optional. It is required when


BBUs are interconnected by connecting
UMPTs. This package is used when the BBUs
are installed in different cabinets.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

RRU Virtual Installation Material Packages


The following table lists RRU virtual installation material packages.
Model

Description

Function

Maxi
mum
Quant
ity

Configuration Principle

QWMPRRUI
NS01

RRU Installation
Materials

RRU
installation
material
package

l This package is optional. Different


auxiliary material packages are selected
for multimode and single-mode fiber optic
cables.

QWMPRRUI
NS04

RRU Installation
Materials(Single
Mode)

RRU
installation
material
package
(single-mode)

l This package applies to an RRU3004/


RRU3008/RU3801E/RRU3804/
RRU3806/RRU3808/RRU3201/
RRU3203/RRU3220/RRU3222.
l Each RRU is configured with one package,
which includes RRU power cables, RRU
fiber optic cables, and CPRI optical
modules.

QWMPRRUI
NS02

RRU Installation
Materials, B

RRU
installation
material
package

QWMPRRUI
NS05

RRU Installation
Materials(Single
Mode)

RRU
installation
material
package
(single-mode)

l This package is optional. It is used for


multimode RRUs, and different auxiliary
material packages are selected for
multimode and single-mode fiber optic
cables.
l This package applies to an RRU3908/
RRU3928/RRU3929/RRU3828/
RRU3829/RRU3926 and is configured
when RRUs use a 2.5 Gbit/s CPRI data
rate.
l Each RRU is configured with one package,
which includes RRU power cables, RRU
fiber optic cables, and CPRI optical
modules.

QWMPRRUI
NS03

RRU Installation
Materials

RRU
installation
materials
(including 4.9
Gbit/s optical
modules)

l This package is optional. A maximum of


4.9 Gbit/s data rate is supported and
different auxiliary material packages are
selected for multimode and single-mode
fiber optic cables.
l Each RRU3240/RRU3942/RRU3841 is
configured with one package.
l For other RRUs, one package is configured
for each RRU when a 4.9 Gbit/s CPRI data
rate is used.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maxi
mum
Quant
ity

QWMPRRUI
NS06

RRU Installation
Materials(Single
Mode)

RRU
installation
material
package
(single-mode,
4.9 Gbit/s
optical
module)

Configuration Principle

RRU Power Cable Installation Packages


The following table lists RRU power cable installation packages.
Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

QW7PRRUC
AP01

DBS3900,RRU
Cable Package
(<=50m)

RRU cable
package (
50 m [164.04
ft]) for a
DBS3900

l This package is optional. Each DC


RRU3936/RRU3824/RRU3826/
RRU3838/RRU3832/RRU3268/
RRU3260/RRU3938/RRU3939/RRU3839
is configured with one package, which
includes DC RRU power cables and PGND
cables.
l This package applies to a BTS3900/
BTS3900L/BTS3900A/DBS3900.

QW7PRRUC
AP00

QW7PAAUC
AP01

RRU Cable
Package (<=100)

RU Cable
Package for
AAU (<=100m)

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

RRU cable
package (
100 m
[328.08 ft])
for a
BTS3900AL

RU cable
package (
100 m
[328.08 ft])

l This package is optional. Each RRU is


configured with one package.
l This package applies to a BTS3900AL.

This package is optional. Each RU is


configured with one package, which includes
DC RU power cables and PGND cables.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

RRU CPRI Installation Material Packages


The CPRI optical transmission material packages apply to the RRU3936/RRU3824/RRU3826/
RRU3838/RRU3832/RRU3268/RRU3260/RRU3938/RRU3939/RRU3839 and RU3260/
RU3268/RU3832.
l

The 2.5 Gbit/s or 4.9 Gbit/s CPRI installation material package is optionally configured
according to the application scenario and port rate of an RRU/RU.

The multimode or single-mode material package is configured according to the type of the
CPRI fiber optic cable.

The following table lists RRU CPRI installation material packages.


Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

WD5P25CP
RI02

DBS3900,CPRI
Optical
Transmission
Materials (2.5G)

Multimode optical
transmission material
package for RRUs
with a 2.5 Gbit/s
CPRI data rate

l This package is optional.


l When using a 2.5 Gbit/s data rate,
each RRU CPRI port is configured
with one package.

WD5P25CP
RI01

BTS3900AL,CPRI
Optical
Transmission
Materials (2.5G)
(Single Mode)

Single-mode optical
transmission material
package for RRUs
with a 2.5 Gbit/s
CPRI data rate

This package applies to a BTS3900/


BTS3900L/BTS3900A/BTS3900AL/
DBS3900.

WD5P49CP
RI02

DBS3900,CPRI
Optical
Transmission
Materials (4.9G)

Multimode optical
transmission material
package for RRUs
with a 4.9 Gbit/s
CPRI data rate

l This package is optional.

Single-mode optical
transmission material
package for RRUs
with a 4.9 Gbit/s
CPRI data rate

WD5P49CP
RI01

BTS3900AL,CPRI
Optical
Transmission
Materials (4.9G)
(Single Mode)

l When using a 4.9 Gbit/s data rate,


each RRU CPRI port is configured
with one package.
This package applies to a BTS3900/
BTS3900L/BTS3900A/BTS3900AL/
DBS3900.

Auxiliary Material Packages for AAU3902 Installation


The following table lists the auxiliary material packages for AAU3902 installation.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

QW7PAA
UCAP00

AAU Power
Cable Package
(<=100m)

RU cable
package (
100 m [328.08
ft])

One package is configured for each AAU3902.

WD5P49C
PRI02

DBS3900,CPRI
Optical
Transmission
Materials (4.9G)

CPRI
multimode
optical
transmission
materials (4.9
Gbit/s)

BTS3900AL,CPR
I Optical
Transmission
Materials (4.9G)
(Single Mode)

CPRI singlemode optical


transmission
materials (4.9
Gbit/s)

WD5P49C
PRI01

The package includes AAU3902 power cables


and PGND cables.
When using multimode fiber optic cables and
optical modules, each AAU3902 is configured
with one package.
The package includes one fiber optic cable and
two optical modules, which support a maximum
rate of 4.9 Gbit/s.
When using single-mode fiber optic cables and
optical modules, each AAU3902 is configured
with one package.
The package includes one fiber optic cable and
two optical modules, which support a maximum
rate of 4.9 Gbit/s.

Materials for an APM30 (Ver.D) to Be Configured with 15 RRUs


Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

QWMPOD
MINS00

ODM Installation
Materials

The outdoor
-48 V power
distribution
box (ODM) is
used to
distribute
power to
RRUs.

l One package is configured for an outdoor


DBS3900 site that uses APM30 (Ver.D)
cabinets and is configured with more than 12
RRUs.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

l Each package includes one ODM, one


mounting kit, and auxiliary installation
materials.
l If 15 RRUs are configured, the maximum
power configuration is as follows: 12 RRUs
(2x60 W)+3 RRUs (2x40 W).

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

QWMPOF
DOFM00

OFD and Optical


Fiber(Multimode)

Outdoor fiber
distribution
box (OFD) and
12-core
multimode
fiber optic
cable, which
support
interconnectio
n of CPRI fiber
optic cables.

l One package is configured for an outdoor


DBS3900 site that uses APM30 (Ver.D)
cabinets and is configured with more than 21
fiber optic cables for RRUs.

OFD and 12core singlemore fiber


optic cable,
which support
interconnectio
n of CPRI fiber
optic cables.

QWMPOF
DOFS00

OFD and Optical


Fiber(Single
mode)

l Each package includes one OFD and one 12core multimode fiber optic cable.
l It is configured when multimode fiber optic
cables are used for CPRI ports.

l One package is configured for an outdoor


DBS3900 site that uses APM30 (Ver.D)
cabinets and is configured with more than 21
fiber optic cables for RRUs.
l Each package includes one OFD and one 12core single-mode fiber optic cable.
l It is configured when single-mode fiber
optic cables are used for CPRI ports.

Site Installation Material Packages


The following table lists the material packages for site installation.
Table 4-76 Material packages for macro base station installation
Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

WD5P0INS
MT00

Installation
Materials for
BTS3900 Ver.B

Installation
materials

l This package is optional. It is a site


installation material package used for
BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinets.
l Each site must be configured with one
package, which includes the base, auxiliary
cables, and low-value installation materials.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

QWMP0IN
SMT06

Installation
Materials for
BTS3900 Ver.C

Installation
materials

l This package is optional. It is a site


installation material package used for
BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinets.
l Each site must be configured with one
package, which includes the base, auxiliary
cables, and low-value installation materials.

QWMP0IN
SMT20

Installation
Materials for
BTS3900 Ver.D

Installation
materials

l This package is optional. It is a site


installation material package used for
BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets.
l One package is configured for each site
configured with a BTS3900 (Ver.D)
cabinet. It includes the base, auxiliary cable,
and low-value installation material.

QWMP0IN
SMT24

QWMP0IN
SMT05

Installation
Materials for
BTS3900 (Ver.D,
220V)

Installation
materials

Installation
Materials for
BTS3900L Ver.B

Installation
materials

l This package is optional. It is a site


installation material package used for
BTS3900 (Ver.D) 220 V AC cabinets.
l Each BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet supplied
with 220 V AC power is configured with one
package. The package includes the base,
auxiliary cables, and low-value installation
materials.

l This package is optional. It is a site


installation material package used for
BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinets.
l Each site must be configured with one
package, which includes the base, auxiliary
cables, and low-value installation materials.

QWMP0IN
SMT07

Installation
Materials for
BTS3900L Ver.C

Installation
materials

l Optional. It is a site installation material


package used for BTS3900L (Ver.C)
cabinets.
l Each site must be configured with one
package, which includes the base, auxiliary
cables, and low-value installation materials.

QWMP0IN
SMT21

Installation
Materials for
BTS3900L Ver.D

Installation
materials

l This package is optional. It is a site


installation material package used for
BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets.
l Each site must be configured with one
package, which includes the base, auxiliary
cables, and low-value installation materials.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

QWMP0IN
SMT24

Installation
Materials for
BTS3900L
(Ver.D, 220V)

Installation
materials

l This package is optional. It is a site


installation material package used for
BTS3900L (Ver.D) 220 V AC cabinets.

Installation
Materials for
BTS3900A Ver.B

Installation
materials

Installation
Materials for
BTS3900A Ver.C

Installation
materials

Installation
Materials for
BTS3900A
(Ver.D, -48VDC)

Installation
material
package for a
BTS3900A
(Ver.D)
cabinet
supplied with
-48 V DC
power

Installation
Materials for
BTS3900A
(Ver.D, 220V/
110VAC)

Installation
material
package for a
BTS3900A
(Ver.D)
cabinet
supplied with
220/110 V AC
power

WD5P0INS
MT01

QWMP0IN
SMT08

QWMP0IN
SMT22

QWMP0IN
SMT23

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

l Each BTS3900L (Ver.D) AC cabinet is


configured with one package. The package
includes the base, auxiliary cables, and lowvalue installation materials.
1

l Optional. It is configured for the BTS3900A


(Ver.B) cabinet.
l Each site must be configured with one
package, which includes the base, auxiliary
cables, and low-value installation materials.

l Optional. It is configured for the BTS3900A


(Ver.C) cabinet.
l Each site must be configured with one
package, which includes the base, auxiliary
cables, and low-value installation materials.
l This package is optional. It is a site
installation material package used for
BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinets.
l Each site must be configured with one
package, which includes the base, auxiliary
cables, and low-value installation materials.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

QWMP0IN
SMT26

Installation
Materials for
BTS3900A
(Ver.E, -48 V DC)

BTS3900A
installation
material
package
(Ver.E, -48 V
DC)

l Optional. It is configured for a BTS3900A


(Ver.E) cabinet supplied with -48 V DC
power.

Installation
Materials for
BTS3900A
(Ver.E, 220 V
DC/110 V AC)

BTS3900A
installation
material
package
(Ver.E, 220 V
AC/110 V AC)

Installation
Materials for
BTS3900AL

Installation
materials

QWMP0IN
SMT27

WD5P0INS
MT09

l Each cabinet must be configured with one


package, which includes the base, cables,
and low-value installation auxiliary
materials.
l Optional. It is configured for a BTS3900A
(Ver.E) cabinet supplied with 220 V DC or
110 V AC power.
l Each cabinet must be configured with one
package, which includes the base, cables,
and low-value installation auxiliary
materials.
l This package is optional. It is a site
installation material package used for
BTS3900AL cabinets.
l Each site must be configured with one
package, which includes the base, auxiliary
cables, and low-value installation materials.

QWMP0IN
SMT03

Installation
Materials for
DBS3900

Installation
materials

Each macro+distributed site must be


configured with one package, which includes
auxiliary cables and low-value installation
materials.

Table 4-77 Material Packages for DBS3900 Installation


Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

WD5P0INS
MT03

Installation
Materials for
DBS3900

Installation
materials

Each distributed site must be configured


with one package. The package includes the
auxiliary cables and low-value installation
materials.

QWMP0INS
MT13

OMB Cabinet
Installation
Materials (Ver.C,
DC)

Installation
materials for an
OMB DC
cabinet

This package is optional for the OMB


(Ver.C) DC cabinet. Each OMB (Ver.C) DC
cabinet is configured with one package.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

QWMP0INS
MT09

OMB Cabinet
Installation
Materials (Ver.C,
AC)

Installation
materials for an
OMB AC
cabinet

This package is optional for the OMB


(Ver.C) AC cabinet. Each OMB (Ver.C) AC
cabinet is configured with one package.

Table 4-78 Auxiliary Material Packages for BTS3900C Installation


Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

QWMP0004
E100

Trunk Cable (75


Ohm, 4E1, 10m)

E1 cable

It needs to be configured when 75 ohm E1


transmission or E1 line clock is used. One
package is configured for every four E1s.

QWMP0004
E101

Trunk Cable (120


Ohm, 4E1, 10m)

E1 cable

It needs to be configured when 120 ohm E1


transmission or E1 line clock is used. One
package is configured for every four E1s.

QWMP0000
FE00

Ethernet Cable

FE/GE cable

One package is configured for each FE/GE


electrical port.

QWMP0000
FE02

Optical Fiber (FE/


STM-1)

FE/STM-1
optical
transmission
package

One package is configured for each FE/


STM-1 optical port when the FE/STM-1
optical port is used. FE/STM-1 optical fibers
work with only BTS3900C (Ver.D)
cabinets.

QWMP0000
GE00

Optical Fiber(GE)

GE optical
transmission
package

One package is configured for each GE


optical port when the GE optical port is used.
GE optical fibers work with only BTS3900C
(Ver.C) cabinets.

QWMP000J
MP02

Top Jumper Cable


Unit for RRU

Jumper package
for common
areas

Jumper package used for distributed base


stations in common areas. Each antenna is
configured with one package.
Note: The number of antennas to be used in
a 4-antenna receive diversity or RRU
backup scenario is twice the number of
antennas used in other scenarios.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Model

Description

Function

Maxim
um
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

QWMP000J
MP03

Top Jumper Cable


Unit for RRU

Jumper package
for cold areas

This package is used in cold areas. Each


antenna in a distributed base station is
configured with one package.
Note: The number of antennas to be used in
a 4-antenna receive diversity or RRU
backup scenario is twice the number of
antennas used in other scenarios.

WD5P25CPR
I0C

CPRI Optical
Transmission
Materials (2.5G)

CPRI optical
transmission
materials (2.5
Gbit/s)

Optional, multimode optical transmission


material package (CPRI 2.5 Gbit/s) for the
RRU One package is configured for each 2.5
Gbit/s CPRI port.

WD5P49CPR
I0C

CPRI Optical
Transmission
Materials (4.9G)

CPRI optical
transmission
materials (4.9
Gbit/s)

Optional, multimode optical transmission


material package (CPRI 4.9 Gbit/s) for the
RRU One package is configured for each 4.9
Gbit/s CPRI port.

QWMP0INS
MT0C

Installation
Materials for
BTS3900C AC
Cabinet

Installation
material
package for a
BTS3900C AC
cabinet

Optional. Site installation material package


for the BTS3900C AC cabinet. One package
is configured for each BTS3900C AC
cabinet.

QWMP0INS
MT1C

Installation
Materials for
BTS3900C DC
Cabinet

Installation
material
package for a
BTS3900C DC
cabinet

Optional. Site installation material package


for the BTS3900C DC cabinet. One package
is configured for each BTS3900C DC
cabinet.

4.9.2 Auxiliary Materials on the Site


This section describes the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on the sites of 3900
series base stations.

BTS3900 or BTS3900L
The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a BTS3900 or
BTS3900L site.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

Table 4-79 Principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a BTS3900 or BTS3900L site
External
Model

Description

Maxim
um
Quanti
ty

Configuration Principle

A000GPS04

GPS Antenna/Feeder
Package

One package is configured when a GPS antenna is


required.

GM1X00IDDF
01

Embedded DDF Box (75


Ohm, 8 E1s)

l If the 75 ohm DDF needs to be provided by


Huawei, it is recommended that each indoor site
be configured with one piece.
l Each package supports 8 E1s.

GM1X00IDDF
02

Embedded DDF Box (120


Ohm, 8 E1s)

l If the 120 ohm DDF needs to be provided by


Huawei, it is recommended that each indoor site
be configured with one piece.
l Each package supports 8 E1s.

QW7PRRUCE
P02

RRU Cable Extension


Package (50 m to 100 m)

Optional. The package is configured when the


distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than
50 m and is shorter than 100 m. Each RRU that meets
the condition is configured with one package.

QW7PRRUCE
P03

RRU Cable Extension


Package (100 m to 150 m)

Optional. The package is configured when the


distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than
100 m and is shorter than 150 m. Each RRU that meets
the condition is configured with one package.

E000ICL00

Indoor Cable Ladder (2.5


m)

This package is configured for site deployment


according to the actual requirement.

WDCDBOX01

Outdoor Cable Ladder (2.5


m)

It is configured according to the actual needs.

EFEDWID01

Thru-Wall Encapsulated
Wiring Window

E000IGU00

Grounding Unit

l It is configured according to the actual needs.


l A maximum of one package can be configured for
each site.
2

l Each indoor site is configured with one ground


bar. When the antenna is provided by Huawei,
each site is configured with two ground bars.
l Optional. One package is optionally configured
for a newly deployed outdoor site according to the
actual requirements.

GM1E00IEMU
01

Embedded Environment
Monitoring Unit

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

One piece is configured for an indoor site where there


are 17 to 32 Boolean alarm inputs.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Description

Maxim
um
Quanti
ty

Configuration Principle

QW7MEMUKI
T01

Environment Monitoring
Unit (with sensors)

l One piece is configured if the environment (such


as the liquid level, smoke, door status,
temperature, and humidity) of the equipment room
needs to be monitored.
l Additionally, 32 Boolean inputs are supported.
l GM1E00IEMU01 is not required when this
package is configured.

GM1X0DNSP
E01

Embedded Environment
Monitoring Unit

WD2M00EEU
M01

Embedded Environment
Monitoring Unit

AANTIFLTER
01

Anti-Interference Filter,
Dual_band pass, RX: 824
to 849 MHz, TX: 869 to
894 MHz, 851 to 856 MHz,
856 to 860 MHz, 898.5 to
915 MHz, 0.9 (824 to 846.5
MHz), 1.2 dB(846.5 to 848
MHz), 1.9 dB(848 to 849
MHz), 0.9 dB (869 to 891.5
MHz), 1.2 dB (891.5 to 894
MHz), 54 dB, double, DIN
female, Outdoor, DC Pass

AANTIFLTER
02

Anti-Interference Filter,
dual_band pass filter, RX:
880 to 905 MHz, TX: 925
to 950 MHz, 869 to 878.5
MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4
dB, 40 dB, double unit,
7/16 DIN female, Outdoor,
DC Pass

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Optional, UK-specific. 17 to 32 Boolean inputs are


required at a site.
The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later.

l This filter applies only to a base station working


at the 850 MHz frequency.
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find
interference from the 800 MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with one such filter, and a sector with
four antennas is configured with two such filters.

l This filter applies only to a base station working


at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the
carriers of a base station are configured as follows:
RX: 880-905 MHz TX: 925-950 MHz.
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find
interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals
from the 850 MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with one such filter, and a sector with
four antennas is configured with two such filters.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Description

AANTIFLTER
03

Anti-Interference Filter,
dual_band pass filter, RX:
885 to 910 MHz, TX: 930
to 955 MHz, 869 to 883.5
MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4
dB, 40 dB, double unit,
7/16 DIN female, Outdoor,
DC Pass

l This filter applies only to a base station working


at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the
carriers of a base station are configured as follows:
RX: 885-910 MHz TX: 930-955 MHz.

Anti-Interference Filter,
dual_band pass filter, RX:
890 to 915 MHz, TX: 935
to 960 MHz, 869 to 888.5
MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4
dB, 40 dB, double unit,
7/16 DIN female, Outdoor,
DC Pass

l This filter applies only to a base station working


at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the
carriers of a base station are configured as follows:
RX: 895.8-915 MHz TX: 940-960 MHz.

Anti-Interference Filter,
dual_band pass filter, RX:
895.8 to 915 MHz, TX: 940
to 960 MHz, 869 to 894
MHz, RX: 1.7 dB, TX: 0.4
dB, 40 dB, double unit,
7/16 DIN female, Outdoor,
DC Pass

l This filter applies only to a base station working


at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the
carriers of a base station are configured as follows:
RX: 895.8-915 MHz TX: 940-960 MHz.

TMA (NoAISG) Auxiliary


Materials Kit (Not
including TMA), GU

l Auxiliary installation material package for an antiinterference filter. One package is configured for
a filter.

AANTIFLTER
04

AANTIFLTER
05

ATMAKIT00

Maxim
um
Quanti
ty

Configuration Principle

l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find


interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals
from the 850 MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with one such filter, and a sector with
four antennas is configured with two such filters.

l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find


interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals
from the 850 MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with one such filter, and a sector with
four antennas is configured with two such filters.

l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find


interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals
from the 850 MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with one such filter, and a sector with
four antennas is configured with two such filters.

l If the filter is provided by the customer or


purchased locally, this item must be manually
removed from the quotation list.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

BTS3900A or BTS3900AL
The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials for a BTS3900A
or BTS3900AL site.
Table 4-80 Principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a BTS3900A, BTS3900AL site
External
Model

Description

Maximu
m
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

A000GPS04

GPS Antenna/Feeder
Package

One package is configured when a GPS antenna is


required.

QW7P00EDDF0
0

Embedded DDF Box (75


Ohm, 8 E1s)

Optional. One package is configured for a new


outdoor macro base station.

E00EDDF02

Embedded DDF Box (120


Ohm, 8 E1s)

Optional. One package is configured for a new


outdoor macro base station.

QW7PRRUCEP
02

RRU Cable Extension


Package (50 m to 100 m)

Optional. The package is configured when the


distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than
50 m and shorter than 100 m. Each RRU that meets
the condition is configured with one package.

QW7PRRUCEP
03

RRU Cable Extension


Package (100 m to 150 m)

Optional. The package is configured when the


distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than
100 m and shorter than 150 m. Each RRU that meets
the condition is configured with one package.

WDCDBOX01

Outdoor Cable Ladder (2.5


m)

Optional. It is configured according to the


requirements for a newly deployed base station.

E000IGU00

Grounding Unit

Optional. One package is optionally configured for


a newly deployed outdoor site according to the
actual requirements.

GM5X00SLPU0
0

Embedded Environment
Monitoring Unit (1-16
Boolean Alarm)

It is configured for an outdoor macro base station


that needs to collect 1 to 16 Boolean alarm inputs.

WD2M00EEU
M00

Embedded Environment
Monitoring Unit

Optional. Configured in an outdoor macro base


station when 17 to 32 Boolean alarms are required.

GM1X0DNSPE
00

Embedded Environment
Monitoring Unit

GM1X0DNSPE
01

Embedded Environment
Monitoring Unit

WD2M00EEU
M01

Embedded Environment
Monitoring Unit

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later.

Optional, UK-specific. 17 to 32 Boolean inputs are


required at a site.
The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Description

Maximu
m
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

WD2K000EIK0
1

Outdoor Adjusted Plinth


(Width 600 mm)

Outdoor Adjusted Plinth (OAP600) for a cabinet


used by the BTS3900A, which is optional. The
OAP600 is configured in outdoor scenarios with
rails. The distance between rails can be adjusted
from 535 mm to 750 mm.
By default, one OAP600 is configured for each RFC,
either a stacked cabinet or a standalone RFC.

WD2K000EIK0
2

Outdoor Adjusted Plinth


(Width 800 mm)

Optional. OAP800, used for installing a


BTS3900AL cabinet on outdoor steel rails.
l The OAP800's width ranges from 480 mm to 780
mm. Its depth ranges from 500 mm to 750 mm.
l Each BTS3900AL is delivered with one
OAP800 by default.

AANTIFLTER0
1

AANTIFLTER0
2

Anti-Interference Filter,
Dual_band pass, RX: 824
to 849 MHz, TX: 869 to
894 MHz, 851 to 856
MHz, 856 to 860 MHz,
898.5 to 915 MHz, 0.9
(824 to 846.5 MHz), 1.2
dB (846.5 to 848 MHz),
1.9 dB (848 to 849 MHz),
0.9 dB (869 to 891.5
MHz), 1.2 dB (891.5 to
894 MHz), 54 dB, double,
DIN female, Outdoor, DC
Pass

Anti-Interference Filter,
dual_band pass filter, RX:
880 to 905 MHz, TX: 925
to 950 MHz, 869 to 878.5
MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4
dB, 40 dB, double unit,
7/16 DIN female, Outdoor,
DC Pass

l This filter applies only to a base station working


at the 850 MHz frequency.
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find
interference from the 800 MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with one such filter, and a sector with
four antennas is configured with two such filters.

l This filter applies only to a base station working


at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the
carriers of a base station are configured as
follows: RX: 880-905 MHz TX: 925-950 MHz.
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find
interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals
from the 850 MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with one such filter, and a sector with
four antennas is configured with two such filters.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External
Model

Description

Maximu
m
Quantit
y

Configuration Principle

AANTIFLTER0
3

Anti-Interference
Filter,dual_band pass
filter,RX:
885-910MHz;TX:
930-955MHz,
869-883.5MHz,RX:
2.1dB;TX:0.4dB,
40dB.,double unit,7/16
DIN female,Outdoor,DC
Pass

l This filter applies only to a base station working


at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the
carriers of a base station are configured as
follows: RX: 885-910 MHz TX: 930-955 MHz.

AANTIFLTER0
4

l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find


interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals
from the 850 MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with one such filter, and a sector with
four antennas is configured with two such filters.

Anti-Interference Filter,
dual_band pass filter, RX:
890 to 915 MHz, TX: 935
to 960 MHz, 869 to 888.5
MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4
dB, 40 dB, double unit,
7/16 DIN female, Outdoor,
DC Pass

l This filter applies only to a base station working


at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the
carriers of a base station are configured as
follows: RX: 895.8-915 MHz TX: 940-960
MHz.
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find
interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals
from the 850 MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with one such filter, and a sector with
four antennas is configured with two such filters.

AANTIFLTER0
5

Anti-Interference Filter,
dual_band pass filter, RX:
895.8 to 915 MHz, TX:
940 to 960 MHz, 869 to
894 MHz, RX: 1.7 dB, TX:
0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit,
7/16 DIN female, Outdoor,
DC Pass

l This filter applies only to a base station working


at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the
carriers of a base station are configured as
follows: RX: 895.8-915 MHz TX: 940-960
MHz.
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find
interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals
from the 850 MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with one such filter, and a sector with
four antennas is configured with two such filters.

ATMAKIT00

TMA (No AISG)


Auxiliary Materials Kit
(Not including TMA), GU

l Auxiliary installation material package for an


anti-interference filter. One package is
configured for a filter.
l If the filter is provided by the customer or
purchased locally, this item must be manually
removed from the quotation list.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

DBS3900
The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a DBS3900
site.
Table 4-81 Principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a DBS3900 site
External Model

Description

Maximu
m
Quantity

Configuration Principle

A000GPS04

GPS Antenna/Feeder
Package

One package is configured when a GPS antenna is


required.

QW7P00EDDF0
0

Embedded DDF Box


(75 Ohm, 8 E1s)

Optional. One package is configured for each newly


deployed distributed base station.

E00EDDF02

Embedded DDF Box


(120 Ohm, 8 E1s)

Optional. One package is configured for each newly


deployed distributed base station.

E000IGU00

Grounding Unit

l Each indoor site is configured with one ground bar.


When the antenna is provided by Huawei, each site
is configured with two ground bars.
l Each site is configured with one or two pieces if
needed.

QW7PRRUCEP0
2

RRU Cable Extension


Package (50 m to 100
m)

Optional. The package is configured when the distance


between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 50 m and
shorter than 100 m. Each RRU that meets the condition
is configured with one package.

QW7PRRUCEP0
3

RRU Cable Extension


Package (100 m to
150 m)

Optional. The package is configured when the distance


between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 100 m and
shorter than 150 m. Each RRU that meets the condition
is configured with one package.

E000ICL00

Indoor Cable Ladder


(2.5 m)

Optional. The package is configured as required if the


BBU is installed indoors in a new distributed base
station.

WDCDBOX01

Outdoor Cable
Ladder (2.5 m)

Optional. It is configured according to the requirements


for a new distributed base station.

GM5X00SLPU0
0

Embedded
Environment
Monitoring Unit
(1-16 Boolean Alarm)

It is optionally configured for a distributed base station


when the BBU is installed outdoors and there are 1 to
16 Boolean alarm inputs.

WD2M00EEUM
00

Embedded
Environment
Monitoring Unit

It is optionally configured when the BBU is installed


outdoors in a distributed base station and 17 to 32
Boolean inputs need be monitored. It is also optional
configured when 1 to 16 Boolean inputs need be
monitored for a +24 V distributed base station.
The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

External Model

Description

Maximu
m
Quantity

GM1X0DNSPE0
0

Embedded
Environment
Monitoring Unit

QW7MEEMUKI
T0

Embedded
Environment
Monitoring Unit
(with sensors)

QW1XEMEUW
S00

Environment
Monitoring Unit
(with sensors)

GM1X0DNSPE0
1

Embedded
Environment
Monitoring Unit

WD2M00EEUM
01

Embedded
Environment
Monitoring Unit

AANTIFLTER0
1

Anti-Interference
Filter, Dual_band
pass, RX: 824 to 849
MHz, TX: 869 to 894
MHz, 851 to 856
MHz, 856 to 860
MHz, 898.5 to 915
MHz, 0.9 (824 to
846.5 MHz), 1.2 dB
(846.5 to 848 MHz),
1.9 dB (848 to 849
MHz), 0.9 dB (869 to
891.5 MHz), 1.2 dB
(891.5 to 894 MHz),
54 dB, double, DIN
female, Outdoor, DC
Pass

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

4 Product Configuration

Configuration Principle

Optional. Configured when the BBU is installed


indoors and the environment (such as the liquid level,
smoke, door status, and temperature and humidity) in
the equipment room needs to be monitored.
It can support 32 Boolean alarm inputs.
The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later.
Optional, UK-specific. 17 to 32 Boolean inputs are
required at a site.
The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later.

l This filter applies only to a base station working at


the 850 MHz frequency.
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find
interference from the 800 MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with one such filter, and a sector with
four antennas is configured with two such filters.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External Model

Description

Maximu
m
Quantity

Configuration Principle

AANTIFLTER0
2

Anti-Interference
Filter, dual_band pass
filter, RX: 880 to 905
MHz, TX: 925 to 950
MHz, 869 to 878.5
MHz, RX: 2.1 dB,
TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB,
double unit, 7/16 DIN
female, Outdoor, DC
Pass

l This filter applies only to a base station working at


the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers
of a base station are configured as follows: RX:
880-905 MHz TX: 925-950 MHz.

Anti-Interference
Filter, dual_band pass
filter, RX: 885 to 910
MHz, TX: 930 to 955
MHz, 869 to 883.5
MHz, RX: 2.1 dB,
TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB,
double unit, 7/16 DIN
female, Outdoor, DC
Pass

AANTIFLTER0
3

AANTIFLTER0
4

AANTIFLTER0
5

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find


interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals
from the 850 MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with one such filter, and a sector with
four antennas is configured with two such filters.

l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find


interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals
from the 850 MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with one such filter, and a sector with
four antennas is configured with two such filters.

Anti-Interference
Filter, dual_band pass
filter, RX: 890 to 915
MHz, TX: 935 to 960
MHz, 869 to 888.5
MHz, RX: 2.1 dB,
TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB,
double unit, 7/16 DIN
female, Outdoor, DC
Pass
Anti-Interference
Filter, dual_band pass
filter, RX: 895.8 to
915 MHz, TX: 940 to
960 MHz, 869 to 894
MHz, RX: 1.7 dB,
TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB,
double unit, 7/16 DIN
female, Outdoor, DC
Pass

l This filter applies only to a base station working at


the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers
of a base station are configured as follows: RX:
885-910 MHz TX: 930-955 MHz.

l This filter applies only to a base station working at


the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers
of a base station are configured as follows: RX:
895.8-915 MHz TX: 940-960 MHz.
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find
interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals
from the 850 MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with one such filter, and a sector with
four antennas is configured with two such filters.
-

l This filter applies only to a base station working at


the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers
of a base station are configured as follows: RX:
895.8-915 MHz TX: 940-960 MHz.
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find
interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals
from the 850 MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with one such filter, and a sector with
four antennas is configured with two such filters.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

4 Product Configuration

External Model

Description

Maximu
m
Quantity

Configuration Principle

ATMAKIT00

TMA (No AISG)


Auxiliary Materials
Kit (Not including
TMA), GU

l Auxiliary installation material package for an antiinterference filter. One package is configured for a
filter.
l If the filter is provided by the customer or purchased
locally, this item must be manually removed from
the quotation list.

BTS3900C
The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a BTS3900C
site.
Table 4-82 Auxiliary materials on a BTS3900C site
External Model

Description

Maximum
Quantity

Configuration Principle

E000IGU00

Grounding Unit

Optional. One package is optionally configured for a


newly deployed outdoor site according to the actual
requirements.

A000GPS04

GPS Antenna/
Feeder Package

One package is configured when a GPS antenna is


required.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Typical Configurations and Capacity


Expansion

This section describes the typical configuration scenarios and capacity expansion scenarios of
3900 series base stations.
5.1 Typical Configurations
5.2 Capacity Expansion Principles

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

5.1 Typical Configurations


This section describes the typical configurations of a 3900 series base station in various
application scenarios.

5.1.1 GSM Mode


This section describes the typical configurations of 3900 series base stations in GSM mode using
RFUs or RRUs.

Typical Configurations of GSM Base Stations (with RFUs)


Table 5-1 and Table 5-2 list the typical configurations of 3900 series macro base stations in
GSM mode and using DRFUs or GRFUs.
NOTE

DRFUs are not configured in a BTS3900AL cabinet.

Table 5-1 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using DRFUs


Product
Configuration

S1/1/1
(Without
a
Combiner
)

S2/2/2
(Withou
ta
Combin
er)

S3/3/3
(With a
Combiner)

S4/4/4
(With a
Combine
r)

S4/4/4
(Withou
ta
Combin
er)

S6/6/6
(With a
Combine
r)

S8/8/8
(With a
Combin
er)

BTS3900 cabinet

BTS3900A
cabinet

BTS3900L cabinet

BBU

GTMU

DRFU

12

3900 Series DRFU


Transceiver (per
TRX) License

12

Antenna

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Table 5-2 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using GRFUs


Product
Configuration

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S6/6/6

S8/8/8

BTS3900 cabinet

BTS3900A
cabinet

BTS3900L cabinet

BTS3900AL
cabinet

BBU

GTMU

GRFU

3900 Series GRFU


Transceiver (per
TRX) License

15

18

Antenna

Typical Configurations of GSM Base Stations (with RRUs)


Table 5-3 and Table 5-4 list the typical configurations of the DBS3900 in GSM mode and using
the RRU3004 or RRU3008.
Table 5-3 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using the RRU3004
Product
Configuration

S1/1/1
(With
out a
Comb
iner)

S2/2/2
(With
out a
Comb
iner)

S3/3/
3
(Wit
ha
Com
biner
)

S4/4
/4
(Wit
ha
Co
mbi
ner)

S4/4/4
(With
out a
Com
biner
)

S6/6/6 (With a
Combiner)

S8/8/8 (With a
Combiner)

Cabinet (optional)

l APM30H
(Ver.B): 2

l APM30H
(Ver.B): 2

l APM30H
(Ver.D): 1

l APM30H
(Ver.D): 1

BBU

GTMU

RRU3004

12

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Product
Configuration

S1/1/1
(With
out a
Comb
iner)

S2/2/2
(With
out a
Comb
iner)

S3/3/
3
(Wit
ha
Com
biner
)

S4/4
/4
(Wit
ha
Co
mbi
ner)

S4/4/4
(With
out a
Com
biner
)

S6/6/6 (With a
Combiner)

S8/8/8 (With a
Combiner)

3900 series
RRU3004
transceiver (per
TRX)

12

Antenna

Table 5-4 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using the RRU3008
Product
Configuration

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S6/6/6

S8/8/8

Cabinet (optional)

BBU

GTMU

RRU3008

3900 series
RRU3008
transceiver (per
TRX)

15

18

Antenna

5.1.2 UMTS Mode


This section describes the typical configurations of 3900 series base stations in UMTS mode
using RFUs or RRUs.
NOTE

l In non-MIMO configurations, each carrier has output power of 20 W. In MIMO configurations, each
carrier has output power of 40 W (2x20 W).
l In actual configuration, only one type of baseband board is selected.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Typical Configurations of UMTS Base Stations (with RFUs)


A 3900 series macro base station in UMTS mode can be configured with WRFUs with different
power, for example, WRFU 80 W and WRFUd 2x60 W. Table 5-5 and Table 5-6 list the typical
configurations of the base stations using different RFUs.
Table 5-5 Typical configurations of a UMTS base station using the WRFU 80 W
Product
Configuration

S1/1/1
NonMIMO

S2/2/2
NonMIMO

S3/3/3
NonMIMO

S4/4/4
NonMIMO

S1/1/1
MIMO

S2/2/2
MIMO

S3/3/3
MIMO

S4/4/4
MIMO

BTS3900 cabinet

BTS3900A cabinet

BTS3900L cabinet

BTS3900AL
cabinet

BBU

WMPT/UMPTa1/
UMPTb1

Baseban
d
processi
ng board

WBBPd

WBBPf
3/4

WRFU of 80 W

Multi Carrier
License (per
Carrier)

Power license (per


20 W)

12

18

Antenna

Table 5-6 Typical configurations of a UMTS base station using the WRFUd 2x60 W
Product
Configuration

S1/1/1
NonMIMO

S2/2/2
NonMIMO

S3/3/3
NonMIMO

S4/4/4
NonMIMO

S1/1/1
MIMO

S2/2/2
MIMO

S3/3/3
MIMO

BTS3900
cabinet

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Product
Configuration

S1/1/1
NonMIMO

S2/2/2
NonMIMO

S3/3/3
NonMIMO

S4/4/4
NonMIMO

S1/1/1
MIMO

S2/2/2
MIMO

S3/3/3
MIMO

BTS3900A
cabinet

BTS3900L
cabinet

BTS3900AL
cabinet

BBU

UMPTa1/
UMPTb1

WBBPf3/4

WRFUd of 2x60
W

Multi Carrier
License (per
Carrier)

Power license
(per 20 W)

15

Antenna

Typical Configurations of UMTS Base Stations (with RRUs)


The following table lists the typical configurations of the DBS3900 in UMTS mode and using
the RRU3806 or RRU3826.
Table 5-7 Typical configurations of the DBS3900 (with the RRU3806/RRU3826)
Product
Configuration

S1/1/1
NonMIMO

S2/2/2
NonMIMO

S3/3/3
NonMIMO

S4/4/4
NonMIMO

S1/1/1
MIM
O

S2/2/2
MIMO

S3/3/3
MIMO

S4/4/4
MIM
O

Cabinet (optional)

BBU

UMPTa1/UMPTb1

Baseban
d board

WBBPd

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

Product
Configuration

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

S1/1/1
NonMIMO

S2/2/2
NonMIMO

S3/3/3
NonMIMO

S4/4/4
NonMIMO

S1/1/1
MIM
O

S2/2/2
MIMO

S3/3/3
MIMO

S4/4/4
MIM
O

RRU3806 80 W

Multi Carrier License


(per Carrier)

Power license (per 20


W)

12

18

Antenna

WBBPf3/
4

The following table lists the typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) in UMTS mode
and using the RRU3806.
Table 5-8 Typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) (with the RRU3806)
Product Configuration

O1

O2

O3

O4

Non-MIMO

Non-MIMO

Non-MIMO

Non-MIMO

OMB (Ver.C) cabinet

BBU

WMPT/UMPTa1/UMPTb1

Baseband
board

WBBPd

WBBPf3/4

RRU3806

Multi Carrier License (per


Carrier)

Power license (per 20 W)

Antenna

5.1.3 LTE Mode


This section describes the typical configurations of 3900 series base stations in LTE mode using
RFUs or RRUs.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

NOTE

l This table assumes that each channel provides 20 W power.


l In actual configuration, only one type of baseband board or RF module is selected.

Typical Configurations of LTE Base Stations (with RFUs)


The following table lists the typical configurations of 3900 series base stations in LTE mode
using LRFUs.
Table 5-9 Typical configurations of LTE base stations using LRFUs
Product Configuration

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2
MIMO

DL 2x2
MIMO

BTS3900 cabinet

BTS3900A cabinet

BTS3900L cabinet

S2/2/2 CoFrequency

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 4x2
MIMO

DL 4x2
MIMO

BTS3900AL cabinet

BBU

LMPT/UMPTa2/
UMPTb1

Baseba
nd
board

LBBPc

LBBPd

1 (LBBPd1)

1 (LBBPd1)

1 (LBBPd2)

1 (LBBPd2)

1 (UBBPd4)

1 (UBBPd4)

10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2
MIMO

2(LBBPd1)/
1 (LBBPd3)

UBBPd

1 (UBBPd3)

1 (UBBPd3)

2 (UBBPd3)/
1 (UBBPd5)

LRFU

RF Output Power (per 20


W)

Carrier Bandwidth - 0
MHz to 5 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 5
MHz to 10 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 10
MHz to 15 MHz

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

Product Configuration

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2
MIMO

DL 2x2
MIMO

Carrier Bandwidth - 15
MHz to 20 MHz

Resource Block

150

BB Transmit Channel

S2/2/2 CoFrequency

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 4x2
MIMO

DL 4x2
MIMO

300

300

150

300

BB Receive Channel

RF Transmit Channel

RF Receive Channel

LTE Multi Carrier (per


Carrier)

Antenna

10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2
MIMO

LTE Base Station Configurations (with RRUs)


The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 in LTE mode and using the
RRU3201.
Table 5-10 Typical configurations of LTE base stations using the RRU3201
Product
Configuration

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 4x2 MIMO

DL 4x2 MIMO

Cabinet (optional)

BBU

UMPTa2/UMPTb1

Baseband
board

LBBPc

LBBPd

UBBPd

1 (UBBPd3)

1 (UBBPd3)

1 (UBBPd4)

1 (UBBPd4)

RRU3201

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

Product
Configuration

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 4x2 MIMO

DL 4x2 MIMO

RF Output Power (per 20


W)

Carrier Bandwidth - 0
MHz to 5 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 5
MHz to 10 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 10
MHz to 15 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 15
MHz to 20 MHz

Resource block (required


for the LBBPd2)

150

300

150

300

BB transmit channel
(required for the
LBBPd2)

Antenna

5.1.4 GU Co-Module
This section describes the typical configurations when the GSM and UMTS modes co-exist in
the RF modules of a 3900 series base station.
NOTE

The power of each WCDMA carrier is configured to 20 W.

GU Co-Module Configurations (with MRFUs)


Multimode RFUs can be configured in a 3900 series macro base station that uses the GU separateMPT or G*U co-MPT mode. The typical configurations in these scenarios are listed in Table
5-11 and Table 5-12.
Table 5-11 Typical configurations of a GU separate-MPT base station using MRFUs
GSM 900 MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

UMTS 900 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

BTS3900A cabinet

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GSM 900 MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

BTS3900L cabinet

BTS3900AL cabinet

BBU

GTMU

WMPT/UMPTa1/
UMPTb1

WBBPd/WBBPf

MRFU/MRFUe/
MRFUd

GSM/UMTS Dual
Mode license (per
sector)

GSM multiple
transceiver for the
2nd TRX of
multimode module

GSM multiple
transceiver for
multimode module

GSM multiple
transceiver for
multimode module

WCDMA Multi
Carrier License for
the 1st Carrier of
Multi-Mode Module
(per Carrier)

WCDMA Multi
Carrier License for
Multi-Mode Module
(per Carrier)

Power license (per


20 W)

Antenna

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Table 5-12 Typical configurations of a G*U co-MPT base station using MRFUs
GSM 900 MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

WCDMA 900 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

BTS3900 cabinet

BTS3900A cabinet

BTS3900L cabinet

BTS3900AL cabinet

BBU

UMPTb1

UBRIb

WBBPf

MRFU/MRFUe/
MRFUd

GSM/UMTS Dual
Mode license (per
sector)

GSM multiple
transceiver for the 2nd
TRX of multimode
module

GSM multiple
transceiver for
multimode module

WCDMA Multi Carrier


License for the 1st
Carrier of Multi-Mode
Module (per Carrier)

WCDMA Multi Carrier


License for Multi-Mode
Module (per Carrier)

Power license (per 20


W)

MPT Multi Mode


license (UMTS) (Per
UMPT)

Antenna

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GU Dual-Mode Configurations (with RRUs)


The RRU3908, RRU3926, or RRU3928 can be configured in a DBS3900 that uses the GU
separate-MPT or G*U co-MPT mode. The typical configurations in these scenarios are listed in
Table 5-13 and Table 5-14.
Table 5-13 Typical configurations of the DBS3900 in separate-MPT mode (with the RRU3908)
GSM 900 MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

WCDMA 900 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

Cabinet (optional)

BBU

GTMU

WMPT/UMPTa1/
UMPTb1

WBBPd/WBBPf

RRU3908/RRU3929/
RRU3928

GSM/UMTS Dual
Mode license (per
sector)

GSM multiple
transceiver for the 2nd
TRX of multimode
module

GSM multiple
transceiver for
multimode module

WCDMA Multi Carrier


License for the 1st
Carrier of Multi-Mode
Module (per Carrier)

WCDMA Multi Carrier


License for MultiMode Module (per
Carrier)

Power license (per 20


W)

Antenna

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Table 5-14 Typical configurations of the DBS3900 in co-MPT mode (with the RRU3929/RRU3928)
GSM 900 MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

WCDMA 900 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

Cabinet (optional)

BBU

UMPTb1

UBRIb

WBBPf

RRU3929/RRU3928

GSM/UMTS Dual
Mode license (per
sector)

GSM multiple
transceiver for the 2nd
TRX of multimode
module

GSM multiple
transceiver for
multimode module

WCDMA Multi Carrier


License for the 1st
Carrier of Multi-Mode
Module (per Carrier)

WCDMA Multi Carrier


License for MultiMode Module (per
Carrier)

Power license (per 20


W)

MPT Multi Mode


license (UMTS)

Antenna

The RRU3929 can be configured in the BTS3900C (Ver.C) that uses the GU separate-MPT or
G*U co-MPT mode. The typical configurations in these scenarios are listed in Table 5-15 and
Table 5-16.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Table 5-15 Typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) in separate-MPT mode (with the RRU3929)
GSM 900 MHz

O1

O2

O3

O4

O4

WCDMA 900 MHz

O1

O1

O1

O1

O2

OMB (Ver.C) cabinet

BBU

GTMU

WMPT/UMPTa1/
UMPTb1

WBBPd/WBBPf

RRU3929

GSM/UMTS Dual Mode


license (per sector)

GSM multiple transceiver


for the 2nd TRX of
multimode module

GSM multiple transceiver


for multimode module

WCDMA Multi Carrier


1
License for the 1st Carrier
of Multi-Mode Module
(per Carrier)

WCDMA Multi Carrier


License for Multi-Mode
Module (per Carrier)

Power license (per 20 W)

Antenna

Table 5-16 Typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) in co-MPT mode (with the RRU3929)
GSM 900 MHz

O1

O2

O3

O4

O4

WCDMA 900 MHz

O1

O1

O1

O1

O2

OMB (Ver.C) cabinet

BBU

UMPTb1

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GSM 900 MHz

O1

O2

O3

O4

O4

UBRIb

WBBPd/WBBPf

RRU3929

GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per


sector)

GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd


TRX of multimode module

GSM multiple transceiver for multimode


module

WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the


1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per
Carrier)

WCDMA Multi Carrier License for


Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)

Power license (per 20 W)

MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS)

Antenna

5.1.5 GU Co-BBU
This section describes the typical configurations when the GSM and UMTS modes co-exist in
a BBU of a 3900 series base station.
NOTE

l In non-MIMO configurations, each carrier provides output power of 20 W. In MIMO configurations,


each carrier provides output power of 40 W (2x20 W).
l In actual configuration, only one type of baseband board or RF module is selected.

Typical Configurations of GU Co-BBU Base Stations (with RFUs)


For a 3900 series base station in GU separate-MPT mode, Table 5-17 lists the typical
configurations when the WRFU of 80 W is used and Table 5-18 lists the typical configurations
when the WRFUd 2x60 W is used.
Table 5-17 Typical configurations of a GU co-BBU separate-MPT base station (with the WRFU of 80 W)
GSM 900 MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

GSM 1800 MHz

N/A

N/A

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

N/A

N/A

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GSM 900 MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

UMTS 2100M

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

NonMIMO

NonMIMO

NonMIMO

NonMIMO

MIMO

MIMO

MIMO

MIMO

BTS3900 cabinet

BTS3900A
cabinet

BTS3900L
cabinet

BTS3900AL
cabinet

BBU

WMPT/
UMPTa1/
UMPTb1

GTMU

WBBPd

WRFU of 80 W

GRFU 900 MHz

GRFU 1800 MHz

Multi Carrier
License (per
Carrier)

RF Output Power
(per 20 W)

12

18

3900 series GRFU


transceiver (per
TRX)

12

12

Antenna

Table 5-18 Typical configurations of a GU co-BBU separate-MPT base station (with the WRFUd of 2x60 W)
GSM 900 MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

GSM 1800 MHz

N/A

N/A

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

N/A

N/A

S3/3/3

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GSM 900 MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

WCDMA 2100
MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

NonMIMO

NonMIMO

NonMIMO

NonMIMO

MIMO

MIMO

MIMO

BTS3900 cabinet

BTS3900A
cabinet

BTS3900L
cabinet

BTS3900AL
cabinet

BBU

UMPTa1/
UMPTb1

GTMU

WBBPf

WRFUd of 2x60
W

GRFU 900 MHz

GRFU 1800 MHz

Multi Carrier
License (per
Carrier)

RF Output Power
(per 20 W)

15

3900 series GRFU 0


transceiver (per
TRX)

12

Antenna

Typical Configurations of GU Co-BBU Base Stations (with RRUs)


The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 that uses the GU co-BBU
mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Table 5-19 Typical configurations of a GU co-BBU separate-MPT base station (with RRUs)
GSM 900
MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

GSM 1800
MHz

N/A

N/A

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

N/A

N/A

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

UMTS 2100M

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

NonMIMO

NonMIMO

NonMIMO

NonMIMO

MIMO

MIMO

MIMO

MIMO

APM30
H
(Ver.B):
2

APM30H
(Ver.B): 2

APM30H
(Ver.B): 2

APM30H
(Ver.B): 2

APM30H
(Ver.B): 2

APM30H
(Ver.B): 2

APM30H
(Ver.D): 1

APM30H
(Ver.D): 1

APM30H
(Ver.D): 1

APM30H
(Ver.D): 1

APM30H
(Ver.D): 1

Cabinet
(optional)

APM30
H
(Ver.D):
1
BBU

WMPT/
UMPTa1/
UMPTb1

GTMU

WBBPd

RRU3806

RRU3008 900
MHz

RRU3008 1800
MHz

Multi Carrier
License (per
Carrier)

Power License
(per 20 W)

12

18

3900 series
RRU3008
transceiver (per
TRX)

12

12

Antenna

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

5.1.6 GL Co-Module
This section describes the typical configurations when the GSM and LTE modes co-exist in the
RF modules of a 3900 series base station.
NOTE

l The following configurations assume that each LTE channel provides 20 W transmit power.
l The following configurations assume that each GSM carrier provides 20 W transmit power.

Typical Configurations of GL Co-Module Base Stations (with RFUs)


Table 5-20 lists the typical configurations of a GL separate-MPT base station using RFUs.
Table 5-21 lists the typical configurations of a GL co-MPT base station using RFUs.
Table 5-20 Typical configurations of a GL separate-MPT base station (with RFUs)
GSM 1800 MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

LTE 1800 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwi
dth

20 MHz
Bandwi
dth

10 MHz
Bandwi
dth

20 MHz
Bandwid
th

20 MHz
Bandwi
dth

10 MHz
Bandwi
dth

20 MHz
Bandwi
dth

DL 2x2
MIMO

DL 2x2
MIMO

DL 2x2
MIMO

DL 2x2
MIMO

10
MHz
Bandw
idth

DL 4x2
MIMO

DL 4x2
MIMO

DL 4x2
MIMO

BTS3900A cabinet

BTS3900L cabinet

BTS3900AL cabinet

BBU

GTMU

UMPTa2/UMPTb1

LBBPd2

MRFUd 1800 MHz

GSM/LTE Dual Mode


license (per sector)

RF Output Power (per


20 W)

Carrier Bandwidth - 0
MHz to 5 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 5
MHz to 10 MHz

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

DL 4x2
MIMO

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GSM 1800 MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

Carrier Bandwidth - 10
MHz to 15 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 15
MHz to 20 MHz

GSM multiple
transceiver for the 2nd
TRX of multimode
module

GSM multiple
transceiver for
multimode module

Resource Block

150

300

150

300

150

300

150

300

BB Transmit Channel

Antenna

Table 5-21 Typical configurations of a GL co-MPT base station (with RFUs)


GSM 1800 MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

LTE 1800 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwi
dth

20 MHz
Bandwi
dth

10 MHz
Bandwi
dth

20 MHz
Bandwi
dth

10 MHz
Bandwi
dth

20 MHz
Bandwi
dth

10 MHz
Bandwi
dth

20 MHz
Bandwi
dth

DL 2x2
MIMO

DL 2x2
MIMO

DL 2x2
MIMO

DL 2x2
MIMO

DL 4x2
MIMO

DL 4x2
MIMO

DL 4x2
MIMO

DL 4x2
MIMO

BTS3900 cabinet

BTS3900A cabinet

BTS3900L cabinet

BTS3900AL cabinet

BBU

UMPTb1

UBRIb

LBBPd2

MRFUd 1800 MHz

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GSM 1800 MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

GSM/LTE Dual Mode


license (per sector)

RF Output Power (per


20 W)

Carrier Bandwidth - 0
MHz to 5 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 5
MHz to 10 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 10
MHz to 15MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 15
MHz to 20 MHz

GSM multiple
transceiver for the 2nd
TRX of multimode
module

GSM multiple
transceiver for
multimode module

Resource Block

150

300

150

300

150

300

150

300

BB Transmit Channel

MPT Multi Mode


license (LTE) (Per
UMPT)

Antenna

Typical configurations of a GL base station using RRUs


The RRU3929 can be configured in the BTS3900C (Ver.C) that uses the GL separate-MPT or
G*L co-MPT mode. The typical configurations in these scenarios are listed in Table 5-22 and
Table 5-23.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Table 5-22 Typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) in separate-MPT mode (with the RRU3929)
GSM 1800 MHz

O1

O2

O3

O4

LTE 1800 MHz

O1

O1

O1

O1

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

2x2 MIMO

2x2 MIMO

2x2 MIMO

2x2 MIMO

OMB (Ver.C) cabinet

BBU

GTMU

UMPTa2

LBBPd2

RRU3929

GSM/LTE Dual Mode license


(per sector)

RF Output Power (per 20 W)

Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to


5 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to


10 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 10 MHz to


15 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 15 MHz to


20 MHz

GSM multiple transceiver for


the 2nd TRX of multimode
module

GSM multiple transceiver for


multimode module

Resource Block

100

100

100

100

BB Transmit Channel

Antenna

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Table 5-23 Typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) in co-MPT mode (with the RRU3929)
GSM 1800 MHz

O1

O2

O3

O4

LTE 1800 MHz

O1

O1

O1

O1

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

2x2 MIMO

2x2 MIMO

2x2 MIMO

2x2 MIMO

OMB (Ver.C) cabinet

BBU

UMPTb1

UBRIb

LBBPd1

RRU3929

GSM/LTE Dual Mode license


(per sector)

RF Output Power (per 20 W)

Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to


5 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to


10 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 10 MHz to


15 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 15 MHz to


20 MHz

GSM multiple transceiver for


the 2nd TRX of multimode
module

GSM multiple transceiver for


multimode module

Resource Block

100

100

100

100

BB Transmit Channel

MPT Multi Mode license


(LTE)

Antenna

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

5.1.7 GL Co-BBU
This section describes the typical configurations when the GSM and LTE modes co-exist in a
BBU of a 3900 series base station.
NOTE

The following configurations assume that each LTE channel provides 20 W transmit power.

Typical Configurations of GL Co-BBU Base Stations (with RFUs)


The following table lists the typical configurations of a 3900 series macro base station that uses
the GL co-BBU separate-MPT mode.
Table 5-24 Typical configurations of a GL co-BBU separate-MPT base station (with RFUs)
GSM 900 MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

GSM 1800
MHz

N/A

N/A

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2
MIMO

DL 2x2
MIMO

DL 2x2
MIMO

20 MHz
Bandwidt
h

DL 4x2
MIMO

DL 4x2
MIMO

BTS3900 cabinet

BTS3900A
cabinet

BTS3900L
cabinet

BTS3900AL
cabinet

BBU

GTMU

LMPT/UMPTa2/
UMPTb1

LBBPc/LBBPd1

GRFU 900 MHz

GRFU 1800
MHz

LRFU

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

DL 2x2
MIMO

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GSM 900 MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

GSM 1800
MHz

N/A

N/A

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2
MIMO

DL 2x2
MIMO

DL 2x2
MIMO

20 MHz
Bandwidt
h

DL 4x2
MIMO

DL 4x2
MIMO

RF Output Power
(per 20 W)

Carrier
Bandwidth - 0
MHz to 5 MHz

Carrier
Bandwidth - 5
MHz to 10 MHz

Carrier
Bandwidth - 10
MHz to 15 MHz

Carrier
Bandwidth - 15
MHz to 20 MHz

3900 series
GRFU
transceiver (per
TRX)

12

12

Antenna

DL 2x2
MIMO

Typical Configurations of GL Co-BBU Base Stations (with RRUs)


The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 that uses the GL co-BBU
separate-MPT mode.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Table 5-25 Typical configurations of a GL co-BBU separate-MPT base station (with RRUs)
GSM 900 MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

GSM 1800 MHz

N/A

N/A

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwid
th

20 MHz
Bandwidt
h

10 MHz
Bandwidt
h

20 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2
MIMO

DL 2x2
MIMO

DL 2x2
MIMO

DL 2x2
MIMO

DL 4x2
MIMO

DL 4x2
MIMO

APM30H
(Ver.B): 2

APM30H
(Ver.B): 2

APM30H
(Ver.B): 2

APM30H
(Ver.B): 2

APM30H
(Ver.D): 1

APM30H
(Ver.D): 1

APM30H
(Ver.D): 1

APM30H
(Ver.D): 1

Cabinet (optional)

BBU

GTMU

LMPT/UMPTa2/
UMPTb1

LBBPc/LBBPd1

RRU3008 900 MHz

RRU3008 1800
MHz

RRU3201

RF Output Power
(per 20 W)

Carrier Bandwidth 0 MHz to 5 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth 5 MHz to 10 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth 10 MHz to 15MHz

Carrier Bandwidth 15 MHz to 20 MHz

3900 series
RRU3008
transceiver (per
TRX)

12

12

Antenna

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

5.1.8 GUL Triple Mode


This section describes the typical configurations a 3900 series base station in triple mode.
NOTE

l In non-MIMO UMTS configurations, each carrier provides output power of 20 W. In MIMO


configurations, each carrier provides output power of 40 W (2x20 W).
l The following configurations assume that each LTE channel provides 20 W transmit power.

Typical Configurations of GUL Base Stations (with RFUs)


Table 5-26, Table 5-27, and Table 5-28 list typical configurations of GUL base stations using
RFUs.
Table 5-26 Typical configurations of a separate-MPT GUL base station
GSM 900 MHz

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

WCDMA 900
MHz

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

GSM 1800 MHz

N/A

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S4/4/4

WCDMA 2100
MHz

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S3/3/3 NonMIMO

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

BTS3900 cabinet

BTS3900A cabinet

BTS3900L cabinet

BTS3900AL
cabinet

BBU

GTMU

WMPT/UMPTa1/
UMPTb1

LMPT/UMPTa2/
UMPTb1

LBBPc

MRFU 900 MHz

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GSM 900 MHz

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

WCDMA 900
MHz

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

GSM 1800 MHz

N/A

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S4/4/4

WCDMA 2100
MHz

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S3/3/3 NonMIMO

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

GRFU 1800 MHz

WRFU 2100 MHz

LRFU 2600 MHz

GSM/UMTS Dual
Mode license (per
sector)

GSM multiple
transceiver for the
2nd TRX of
multimode module

GSM multiple
transceiver for
multimode module

Multiple
Transceiver (Per
TRX)

WCDMA Multi
Carrier License for
the 1st Carrier of
Multi-Mode Module
(per Carrier)

WCDMA Multi
Carrier License for
Multi-Mode Module
(per Carrier)

Power license (per


20 W)

Multi Carrier
License (per
Carrier)

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GSM 900 MHz

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

WCDMA 900
MHz

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

GSM 1800 MHz

N/A

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S4/4/4

WCDMA 2100
MHz

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S3/3/3 NonMIMO

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

RF Output Power
(per 20 W)

Carrier Bandwidth 0 MHz to 5 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth 5 MHz to 10 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth 10 MHz to 15 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth 15 MHz to 20 MHz

Antenna

12

12

12

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Table 5-27 Typical configurations of GU+L(G)/GL+U(G) base stations


GSM 900 MHz

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

WCDMA 900
MHz

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

GSM 1800 MHz

S3/3/3

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S4/4/4

LTE 1800 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

WCDMA 2100
MHz

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S3/3/3 NonMIMO

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

BTS3900 cabinet

BTS3900A cabinet

BTS3900L cabinet

BTS3900AL
cabinet

BBU

GTMU

UMPTa1/UMPTb1

UCIU

WBBPf

UMPTa2/UMPTb1

LBBPd2

MRFU 900 MHz

MRFU 1800 MHz

WRFU 2100 MHz

LRFU 2600 MHz

GSM/UMTS Dual
Mode license (per
sector)

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GSM 900 MHz

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

WCDMA 900
MHz

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

GSM 1800 MHz

S3/3/3

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S4/4/4

LTE 1800 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

WCDMA 2100
MHz

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S3/3/3 NonMIMO

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

GSM/LTE Dual
Mode license (per
sector)

GSM multiple
transceiver for the
2nd TRX of
multimode module

GSM multiple
transceiver for
multimode module

WCDMA Multi
Carrier License for
the 1st Carrier of
Multi-Mode Module
(per Carrier)

WCDMA Multi
Carrier License for
Multi-Mode Module
(per Carrier)

Power license (per


20 W)

Multi Carrier
License (per
Carrier)

RF Output Power
(per 20 W)

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GSM 900 MHz

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

WCDMA 900
MHz

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

GSM 1800 MHz

S3/3/3

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S4/4/4

LTE 1800 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

WCDMA 2100
MHz

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S3/3/3 NonMIMO

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

Carrier Bandwidth 0 MHz to 5 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth 5 MHz to 10 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth 10 MHz to 15 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth 15 MHz to 20 MHz

Resource Block

300

300

600

600

Antenna

12

12

12

12

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Table 5-28 Typical configurations of G*U*L base stations


GSM 900 MHz

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

WCDMA 900
MHz

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

GSM 1800 MHz

S3/3/3

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S4/4/4

LTE 1800 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

WCDMA 2100
MHz

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S3/3/3 NonMIMO

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

BTS3900 cabinet

BTS3900A cabinet

BTS3900L cabinet

BTS3900AL
cabinet

BBU

UMPTb1

UBRIb

WBBPf

LBBPd2

MRFU 900 MHz

MRFU 1800 MHz

WRFU 2100 MHz

LRFU 2600 MHz

GSM/UMTS Dual
Mode license (per
sector)

GSM/LTE Dual
Mode license (per
sector)

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GSM 900 MHz

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

WCDMA 900
MHz

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

GSM 1800 MHz

S3/3/3

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S4/4/4

LTE 1800 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

WCDMA 2100
MHz

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S3/3/3 NonMIMO

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

GSM multiple
transceiver for the
2nd TRX of
multimode module

GSM multiple
transceiver for
multimode module

WCDMA Multi
Carrier License for
the 1st Carrier of
Multi-Mode Module
(per Carrier)

WCDMA Multi
Carrier License for
Multi-Mode Module
(per Carrier)

Power license (per


20 W)

Multi Carrier
License (per
Carrier)

RF Output Power
(per 20 W)

Carrier Bandwidth 0 MHz to 5 MHz

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GSM 900 MHz

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

WCDMA 900
MHz

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

GSM 1800 MHz

S3/3/3

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S4/4/4

LTE 1800 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

WCDMA 2100
MHz

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S3/3/3 NonMIMO

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

Carrier Bandwidth 5 MHz to 10 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth 10 MHz to 15 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth 15 MHz to 20 MHz

Resource Block

300

300

600

600

MPT Multi Mode


license (UMTS)
(Per UMPT)

MPT Multi Mode


license (LTE) (Per
UMPT)

Antenna

12

12

12

12

Typical Configurations of GUL Base Stations (with RRUs)


Table 5-29 lists typical configurations of separate-MPT GU+L(G) base stations using RRUs.
Table 5-30 lists typical configurations of co-MPT G*U*L base stations using RRUs.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Table 5-29 Typical configurations of GU+L(G) base stations using RRUs


GSM 900 MHz

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

WCDMA 900
MHz

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

GSM 1800 MHz

N/A

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S4/4/4

WCDMA 2100
MHz

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S3/3/3 NonMIMO

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

APM30H (Ver.C): 2

APM30H (Ver.C): 2

APM30H (Ver.C): 2

APM30H (Ver.C): 2

APM30H (Ver.D): 1

APM30H (Ver.D): 1

APM30H (Ver.D): 1

APM30H (Ver.D): 1

BBU

GTMU

WMPT/UMPTa1/
UMPTb1

WBBPd/WBBPf

UMPTa2/UMPTb1

LBBPc/LBBPd1

UCIU

RRU3908 900 MHz

RRU3929 1800
MHz

WRRU 2100 MHz

LRRU 2600 MHz

GSM/UMTS Dual
Mode license (per
sector)

GSM multiple
transceiver for the
2nd TRX of
multimode module

GSM multiple
transceiver for
multimode module

Cabinet (optional)

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GSM 900 MHz

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

WCDMA 900
MHz

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

GSM 1800 MHz

N/A

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S4/4/4

WCDMA 2100
MHz

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S3/3/3 NonMIMO

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

Multiple
Transceiver (Per
TRX)

WCDMA Multi
Carrier License for
the 1st Carrier of
Multi-Mode Module
(per Carrier)

WCDMA Multi
Carrier License for
Multi-Mode Module
(per Carrier)

Power license (per


20 W)

Multi Carrier
License

RF Output Power
(per 20 W)

Carrier Bandwidth 0 MHz to 5 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth 5 MHz to 10 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth 10 MHz to 15 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth 15 MHz to 20 MHz

Antenna

12

12

12

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Table 5-30 Typical configurations of G*U*L base stations


GSM 900 MHz

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

WCDMA 900
MHz

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

GSM 1800 MHz

S3/3/3

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S4/4/4

LTE 1800 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

WCDMA 2100
MHz

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S3/3/3 NonMIMO

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

l APM30H
(Ver.C): 2

l APM30H
(Ver.C): 2

l APM30H
(Ver.C): 2

l APM30H
(Ver.C): 2

l APM30H
(Ver.D): 1

l APM30H
(Ver.D): 1

l APM30H
(Ver.D): 1

l APM30H
(Ver.D): 1

BBU

UMPTb1

UBRIb

WBBPf

LBBPd2

RRU3929 900 MHz

RRU3929 1800
MHz

RRU3829 2100
MHz

RRU3201 2600
MHz

GSM/UMTS Dual
Mode license (per
sector)

GSM/LTE Dual
Mode license (per
sector)

Cabinet (optional)

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GSM 900 MHz

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

WCDMA 900
MHz

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

GSM 1800 MHz

S3/3/3

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S4/4/4

LTE 1800 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

WCDMA 2100
MHz

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S3/3/3 NonMIMO

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

GSM multiple
transceiver for the
2nd TRX of
multimode module

GSM multiple
transceiver for
multimode module

WCDMA Multi
Carrier License for
the 1st Carrier of
Multi-Mode Module
(per Carrier)

WCDMA Multi
Carrier License for
Multi-Mode Module
(per Carrier)

Power license (per


20 W)

Multi Carrier
License (per
Carrier)

RF Output Power
(per 20 W)

Carrier Bandwidth 0 MHz to 5 MHz

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GSM 900 MHz

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

WCDMA 900
MHz

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S1/1/1 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

GSM 1800 MHz

S3/3/3

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S4/4/4

LTE 1800 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

WCDMA 2100
MHz

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S2/2/2 NonMIMO

S3/3/3 NonMIMO

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

Carrier Bandwidth 5 MHz to 10 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth 10 MHz to 15 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth 15 MHz to 20 MHz

Resource Block

300

300

600

600

MPT Multi Mode


license(LTE)

MPT Multi Mode


license (UMTS)

Antenna

12

12

12

12

Typical configurations of GUL base stations using RFUs and RRUs


The following table lists typical configurations of GUL base stations using RFUs and RRUs.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Table 5-31 Typical configurations of GUL base stations using RFUs and RRUs
LTE 800 MHz

S1/1/1

N/A

S1/1/1

20 MHz Bandwidth

20 MHz Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

GSM 900 MHz

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

WCDMA 900 MHz

S1/1/1 Non-MIMO

S2/2/2 Non-MIMO

S2/2/2 Non-MIMO

GSM 1800 MHz

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S4/4/4

WCDMA 2100 MHz

S2/2/2 Non-MIMO

S2/2/2 MIMO

S3/3/3 MIMO

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz Bandwidth

20 MHz Bandwidth

20 MHz Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

BTS3900 cabinet

BTS3900A cabinet

BTS3900L cabinet

BTS3900AL cabinet

BBU

GTMU

WMPT/UMPTa1/
UMPTb1

WBBPd

LMPT/UMPTa2/
UMPTb1

LBBPc

MRFU 900 MHz

GRFU 1800 MHz

WRFU 2100 MHz

LRFU 2600 MHz

RRU 2600 MHz

RRU 800 MHz

GSM/UMTS Dual Mode


license (per sector)

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

LTE 800 MHz

S1/1/1

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

N/A

S1/1/1

20 MHz Bandwidth

20 MHz Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

GSM 900 MHz

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

WCDMA 900 MHz

S1/1/1 Non-MIMO

S2/2/2 Non-MIMO

S2/2/2 Non-MIMO

GSM 1800 MHz

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S4/4/4

WCDMA 2100 MHz

S2/2/2 Non-MIMO

S2/2/2 MIMO

S3/3/3 MIMO

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz Bandwidth

20 MHz Bandwidth

20 MHz Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

GSM multiple transceiver


for the 2nd TRX of
multimode module

GSM multiple transceiver


for multimode module

3900 series GRFU


transceiver (per TRX)

WCDMA Multi Carrier


License for the 1st Carrier
of Multi-Mode Module
(per Carrier)

WCDMA Multi Carrier


License for Multi-Mode
Module (per Carrier)

Power license (per 20 W)

15

Multi Carrier License (per


Carrier)

RF Output Power (per 20


W)

Carrier Bandwidth - 0
MHz to 5 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 5
MHz to 10 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 10
MHz to 15 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 15
MHz to 20 MHz

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

LTE 800 MHz

S1/1/1

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

N/A

S1/1/1

20 MHz Bandwidth

20 MHz Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

GSM 900 MHz

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

WCDMA 900 MHz

S1/1/1 Non-MIMO

S2/2/2 Non-MIMO

S2/2/2 Non-MIMO

GSM 1800 MHz

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S4/4/4

WCDMA 2100 MHz

S2/2/2 Non-MIMO

S2/2/2 MIMO

S3/3/3 MIMO

LTE 2600 MHz

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

10 MHz Bandwidth

20 MHz Bandwidth

20 MHz Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

12

12

12

Antenna

5.1.9 GU Co-BBP
This section describes the typical configurations of 3900 series base stations in GU co-BBP
mode.
The following table lists the typical configurations of a base station using GU co-MPT and coBBP and configured with WRFUs of 80 W.
Table 5-32 Typical configurations of a base station using GU co-MPT and co-BBP and configured with WRFUs of
80 W
GSM 900
MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

GSM 1800
MHz

N/A

N/A

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

N/A

N/A

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

UMTS 2100
MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S3/3/3

S4/4/4

NonMIMO

NonMIMO

NonMIMO

NonMIMO

MIMO

MIMO

MIMO

MIMO

BTS3900L
cabinet

BTS3900A
cabinet

BTS3900
cabinet

BTS3900AL
cabinet

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

GSM 900
MHz

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

BBU

UMPTb1

UBBPd1

UBBPd2

WRFU (80 W)

GRFU 900M

GRFU 1800M

Multi Carrier
License

Power License
(per 20 W)

12

18

3900 series
GRFU
transceiver (per
TRX)

12

12

UBBP FirstMode license


(GSM) (Per
UBBP)

UBBP MultiMode license


(UMTS) (Per
UBBP)

Antenna

(per Carrier)

5.1.10 Typical Configurations of an AAU3910 in 2.6 A+1.8 P/2.1 P


Scenarios
This section describes the typical configurations of an AAU3910 in 2.6 A+1.8 P/2.1 P scenarios.
The following table describes the typical configurations of an AAU3910 that is in 2T4R mode
and supports 2x40 W output power in 2.6 A+1.8 P/2.1 P scenarios.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Table 5-33 Typical configurations in 2.6 A+1.8 P/2.1 P scenarios (2T4R 2x40 W)
LTE Configuration

S1/1/1

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S2/2/2

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

10 MHz
Bandwidth

20 MHz
Bandwidth

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

DL 2x2 MIMO

Cabinet (optional)

APM30H (Ver.D):
1

APM30H (Ver.D):
1

APM30H (Ver.D):
1

APM30H (Ver.D):
1

BBU

UMPTa2

LBBPd1

LBBPd2

AAU3910 2.6 A+1.8 P/


2.1 P

RF Output Power (per


20 W)

Carrier Bandwidth - 0
MHz to 5 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 5
MHz to 10 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 10 0
MHz to 15 MHz

Carrier Bandwidth - 15 0
MHz to 20 MHz

Resource block
(required for the
LBBPd2)

150

300

BB transmit channel
(required for the
LBBPd2)

Antenna

Baseband
board

5.1.11 Typical Configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+ (790~960)


P+(1710~2690) P Scenarios
This section describes the typical configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+ (790~960) P
+(1710~2690) P scenarios.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

The following table lists the typical configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+ (790~960) P
+(1710~2690) P scenarios.
Table 5-34 Typical configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+ (790~960) P+(1710~2690) P scenarios
WCDMA
Configuration

S1/1/1

S2/2/2

S4/4/4

S2/2/2

S4/4/4

S2/2/2

S4/4/4

NonMIM
O

NonMIM
O

NonMIM
O

MIMO

MIMO

2x20W/
C

2x10W/
C

20W/
C

20W/
C

20W/
C

2T4R
Config
uration
s

2T4R
Config
uratio
ns

2x20W/
C

2x10W
/C

S2/2/2
/2/2/2

S4/4/4/
4/4/4

2T2R
Confi
gurati
ons

2T2R
Config
uration
s

2x10
W/C

2x5 W

BBU

UMPTb1

WBBPf4

AAU3902

Multi Carrier
License

21

AAS Virtual
Four Uplink
Channels (per
RU)

AAS Vertical
Multiple Sector
(per RU)

(per Carrier)
Power License
(per 20W)

5.1.12 Typical Configurations of an AAU3902 in 1800 A+ (790~960)


P+(1710~2690) P Scenarios
This section describes the typical configurations of an AAU3902 in 1800 A+ (790~960) P
+(1710~2690) P scenarios.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

Table 5-35 Typical configurations of an AAU3902 in 1800 A+ (790~960) P+(1710~2690) P


scenarios
LTE
and
GSM

LOS1/1/
1

LOS2/2/
2

LOS1/1/
1

Config
uration

2x2
MIM
O

2x2
MIM
O

4x4
MIM
O

2x40
W

2x20
W

4x20
W

LOS2/2/2
4x4
MIM
O
4x10
W

GLS6/6/6
+S1/1/1

GLS4/4/4
+S1/1/1

LO
S2/2/2/
2/2/2

G-6trx,
10 W per
carrier

G-4trx,
10 W per
carrier

2x2
MIMO

L-2x2
MIMO

L-4x4
MIMO

2x10 W

4x10 W

2x10 W

GL
S4/4/4+
S1/1/1/1
/1/1,
10 W
2x2
MIMO
2x10 W

BBU

UMPTa
1

UBBPd1

UBBPd3

UBBPd5

AAU390
2

Multi
Carrier

15

12

Impact
on
license
manage
ment
(per
carrier)
Power
License
(per 20
W)
AAS
Virtual
Four
Uplink
Channel
s (per
RU)

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

SingleRAN
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles

5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion

LTE
and
GSM

LOS1/1/
1

LOS2/2/
2

LOS1/1/
1

Config
uration

2x2
MIM
O

2x2
MIM
O

4x4
MIM
O

2x40
W

2x20
W

4x20
W

AAS
Vertical
Multiple

LOS2/2/2
4x4
MIM
O
4x10
W

GLS6/6/6
+S1/1/1

GLS4/4/4
+S1/1/1

LO
S2/2/2/
2/2/2

G-6trx,
10 W per
carrier

G-4trx,
10 W per
carrier

2x2
MIMO

L-2x2
MIMO

L-4x4
MIMO

2x10 W

4x10 W

2x10 W

GL
S4/4/4+
S1/1/1/1
/1/1,
10 W
2x2
MIMO
2x10 W

Sectors
(per RU)

5.2 Capacity Expansion Principles


This section describes the capacity expansion principles for 3900 series base stations.
The following table lists the capacity expansion principles for 3900 series base stations.
Table 5-36 Capacity expansion principles
Expansion Item

Principle

Radio frequency
capacity

If the capacity to be expanded does not exceed the hardware capability, first expand the
multi-carrier license and power, and then add RFUs and RRUs.

Baseband capacity

If the capacity to be expanded does not exceed the hardware capability, first expand the
license, and then add baseband boards.

Transmission
capacity

If more than four E1s/T1s or more than one FE electrical or optical port is required, add
UTRP boards to provide more transmission ports.

NOTE

For the typical configurations after capacity expansion, see 5.1 Typical Configurations.

Issue 13 (2015-08-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

232